owners manual - gmc · this manual including, but not limited to, gm, the gm logo, gmc, the gmc...

23380337 B

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

18_GMC_Savana_COV_en_US_23380337B_2018FEB12.ai 1 2/2/2018 1:13:32 PM18_GMC_Savana_COV_en_US_23380337B_2018FEB12.ai 1 2/2/2018 1:13:32 PM

GMC Savana Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada-11374214) -2018 - CRC - 2/2/18

Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Keys, Doors, and Windows . . . . . 24

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Instruments and Controls . . . . . . . 89

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 127

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . . 160

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Service and Maintenance . . . . . 299

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Customer Information . . . . . . . . . 316

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . 327

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342


2 Introduction

Introduction

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, GMC, theGMC Truck Emblem, and SAVANAare trademarks and/or servicemarks of General Motors LLC, itssubsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Company” forGMC wherever it appears in thismanual.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on the vehiclebecause of optional equipment thatwas not purchased on the vehicle,model variants, countryspecifications, features/applicationsthat may not be available in yourregion, or changes subsequent tothe printing of this owner’s manual.

If the vehicle has the DuramaxDiesel engine, see the Duramaxdiesel supplement for additional andspecific information on this engine.

Refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm thefeatures.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle OwnersA French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

Propriétaires Canadiens

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170USA

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 23380337 B Second Printing ©2018 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


Introduction 3

Danger, Warning, andCautionWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

{ Danger

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will resultin serious injury or death.

{ Warning

Warning indicates a hazard thatcould result in injury or death.

Caution

Caution indicates a hazard thatcould result in property or vehicledamage.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : Shown when the owner’smanual has additional instructionsor information.

* : Shown when the servicemanual has additional instructionsor information.

0 : Shown when there is moreinformation on another page —“see page.”

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. See thefeatures in this manual forinformation.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

` : Do Not Puncture

^ : Do Not Service

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

_ : Flame/Fire Prohibited

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : ISOFIX/LATCH System ChildRestraints


4 Introduction

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

O : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Seat Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak

a : Under Pressure

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


In Brief 5

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . 8Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 8Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . 11Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . 12Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . 14Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Vehicle FeaturesInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . 17Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . . . 18Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . 19Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 20Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Performance and MaintenanceTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . 22Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Fuel (Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . 22Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23


6 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 7

1. Air Vents 0 159.

2. Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons (Out of View). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 109.

3. Turn Signal Lever. See Turnand Lane-Change Signals0 123.

Windshield Wiper/Washer 0 91.

4. Horn 0 91.

5. Hazard Warning Flashers0 123.

6. Instrument Cluster 0 97.

7. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission 0 180.

Manual Mode 0 183 (IfEquipped).

8. Climate Control Systems0 154.

9. Infotainment 0 127.

10. Power Outlets 0 94.

11. USB Port (If Equipped). SeeAuxiliary Devices 0 141.

12. Power Outlet 110/120 VoltAlternating Current. See PowerOutlets 0 94.

13. Rear Heating System 0 156 (IfEquipped).

14. Passenger Airbag On-OffSwitch (If Equipped). SeeAirbag On-Off Switch 0 63.

15. Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 186.

16. Tow/Haul Mode Button (IfEquipped). See Tow/HaulMode 0 184.

17. Steering Wheel Controls 0 90(If Equipped).

18. Steering Wheel Adjustment0 89 (Out of View), (IfEquipped).

19. Parking Brake Release. SeeParking Brake 0 185.

20. Cruise Control 0 189 (IfEquipped).

Fast Idle System 0 174 (IfEquipped).

21. Parking Brake 0 185.

22. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (Check EngineLight) 0 103.

23. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 124.

Dome Lamp Override. SeeDome Lamps 0 124.

24. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 120.


8 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner’s manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemIf equipped, the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter is used toremotely lock and unlock the doorsfrom up to 60 m (197 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

RKE Transmitter with RemoteStart Shown

Q : Press to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized. See VehiclePersonalization 0 115.

K : Press to unlock the driver door.Press K again within five secondsto unlock all remaining doors.

j : Press to unlock only the cargodoors.

L : Press and release to locatethe vehicle. PressL and hold formore than two seconds to sound thepanic alarm. PressL again tocancel the panic alarm or turn theignition on.

See Keys 0 24 and Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 26.

Remote Vehicle StartIf equipped, the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Press and release Q on theRKE transmitter.

2. Immediately press and hold /for at least four seconds or untilthe turn signal lamps flash.

Start the vehicle normally afterentering.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on.

Remote start can be extended.


In Brief 9

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start 0 28.

Door Locks

Manual Door Locks

Lock and unlock the door from theoutside using the key or the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,if equipped. From the inside, slidethe manual lever on the door upor down.

See Door Locks 0 29.

Power Door Locks

If equipped, press T to lock orunlock the doors.

See Power Door Locks 0 30.

Windows

Manual Windows

Turn the hand crank on each doorto raise or lower the side doorwindows.

See Manual Windows 0 38.

Power Windows

If equipped, power windows workwhen the ignition is on, in ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 175.


10 In Brief

Using the window switch, press toopen or pull to close the window.

The windows may be temporarilydisabled if they are used repeatedlywithin a short time.

See Power Windows 0 38.

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

To adjust the manual seat:

1. Lift the bar under the frontedge of the seat cushion tounlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure the seat islocked in place.

See Seat Adjustment 0 42.

Power Seats

To adjust a power seat, if available,use the controls on the front ofthe seat:

. Adjust the seat by moving thecenter knob up, down, right,or left.

. Raise and lower the front or rearof the seat cushion by movingthe right or left lever up or down.

See Power Seat Adjustment 0 42.

Reclining Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever on the inboardside of the seat.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatbackto make sure it is locked.


In Brief 11

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


See Reclining Seatbacks 0 43.

Seat Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to useseat belts properly:

. Seat Belts 0 47.

. How to Wear Seat Belts Properly0 48.

. Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 49.

. Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 75.

Airbag On-Off SwitchIf the instrument panel has one ofthe switches pictured in thefollowing illustrations, the vehiclehas an airbag on-off switch that youcan use to manually turn on or offthe front outboard passenger airbag.

United States

Canada

To operate the airbag on-off switch,use the vehicle key.


12 In Brief

See Airbag On-Off Switch 0 63 forimportant information.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

Vehicles with manual outsidemirrors can be adjusted by movingthe mirror up and down or left andright so you can see a little of theside of the vehicle, and a clear viewof objects behind you.

If equipped with power mirrors,select each mirror by turning theknob clockwise for the passengerside mirror or counterclockwise for

the driver side mirror. Adjust themirror angle by moving the knob inthe desired direction.

Keep the selector switch in thecenter position when not adjustingeither outside mirror.

If equipped, towing mirrors can beadjusted manually for a clear viewof the objects behind you.

Manually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash. Tofold, pull the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward toreturn it to the original position.

Interior Mirror

Adjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind yourvehicle.

Push the tab forward for daytimeuse and pull it rearward fornighttime use to avoid glare of theheadlamps from behind.

See Manual Rearview Mirror 0 37.

Steering WheelAdjustment


In Brief 13

If equipped with a tilt steering wheel,the lever is on the left side of thesteering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever to move thesteering wheel up or down intoa comfortable position.

2. Release the lever to lock thesteering wheel in place.

See Steering Wheel Adjustment0 89.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamps come on when anydoor is opened. They turn off afterall the doors are closed.

The instrument panel brightnessknob extends whenD is pressed.To manually turn on the domelamps, pressD then turn the knobclockwise to the farthest position. Inthis position, the dome lampsremain on whether a door is openedor closed.

E DOME OFF : This button islocated above the instrument panelbrightness knob.

Press the button in and the domelamps remain off when a door isopened. Press the button again sothat the dome lamps come on whena door is opened.

Reading Lamps

If equipped with reading lamps,press the button located next toeach lamp to turn it on or off.

The vehicle may also have readinglamps in other locations. The lampscannot be adjusted.

For more information on interiorlighting, see:

. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 124.

. Entry/Exit Lighting 0 125.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.


14 In Brief

O : Briefly turn the control to thisposition to turn the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) off or back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position only works forvehicles that are shifted into theP (Park) position.

AUTO : Automatically turns theexterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

2 : Turns on the headlampstogether with the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

See:

. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 120

. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)0 121

. Automatic Headlamp System0 122

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The lever is on the left side of thesteering column.

8 : Use for a single wiping cycle.

6 : Use to adjust the delay timebetween wipes. Turn the band up ordown for more frequent wipes orless frequent wipes.

d : Fast wipes.

a : Slow wipes.

9 : Use to turn the wipers off.

L : Push the paddle on top of theturn signal lever to spray washerfluid on the windshield.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer 0 91.


In Brief 15

Climate ControlsThe vehicle's heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled with thesesystems.

Vehicles without Air Conditioning

1. Fan Control

2. Temperature Control

3. Air Delivery Mode Control


16 In Brief

Vehicles with Air Conditioning

1. Fan Control



4. Rear Window Defogger

See Climate Control Systems 0 154.See Rear Heating System 0 156,if equipped or Rear Climate ControlSystem 0 156, if equipped.

Transmission

Range Selection Mode

If equipped, Range Selection Modehelps control the vehicle'stransmission and vehicle speed

while driving downhill or towing atrailer by letting you select a desiredrange of gears.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the +/− buttons on theshift lever, to select the desiredrange of gears for currentdriving conditions.

When M (Manual Mode) is selected,the transmission will downshift anda number displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) next to theM indicating the current gear.

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode 0 184.

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/HaulMode can be used. See ManualMode 0 183.


In Brief 17

Vehicle Features

Infotainment SystemIf the vehicle has a base radio it isincluded in this manual. See theseparate infotainment manual forinformation on the connected radios,audio players, phone, navigationsystem, and voice or speechrecognition. There is alsoinformation on settings anddownloadable applications (ifequipped).

Radio(s)

Radio with CD/MP3

O : Press to turn the system on andoff. Turn to increase or decrease thevolume.

BAND : Press to choose betweenFM1, FM2, AM, and SiriusXM,if equipped.

f : Turn to select radio stations.

© SEEK or ¨ SEEK : Seek or scanstations.

4 : Press to switch the displaybetween the radio station frequencyand the time. While the ignition isoff, press this button to display thetime. Press to display additional textinformation related to the current


18 In Brief

FM-RDS station or MP3 song.A choice of additional informationsuch as Channel, Song, Artist, andCAT (category) can display.Continue pressing to highlight thedesired tab, or press the softkeyunder any one of the tabs and theinformation about that tab displays.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeInfotainment 0 127.

Storing a Favorite Station

Depending on which radio thevehicle has, radio stations arestored as either favorites or presets.

For vehicles with a FAV button, amaximum of 36 stations can bestored as favorites using the sixsoftkeys below the radio stationfrequency tabs and by using theradio FAV button. Press FAV to gothrough up to six pages of favorites,each having six favorite stationsavailable per page. Each page offavorites can contain anycombination of AM and FM stations.

For more information on storing afavorite station, see Operation0 131.

Setting the Clock

1. With the radio on, press H andthe HR, MIN, MM, DD, andYYYY (hour, minute, month,day, and year) display.

2. Press the softkey under anyone of the tabs to be changed.

3. Press © SEEK or ¨ SEEK,s REV or\ FWD, or turn fclockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease thetime or date.

For more information on setting theclock, see Clock 0 93.

Satellite RadioSiriusXM® is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.SiriusXM satellite radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.

A fee is required to receive theSiriusXM service.

For more information, refer to:

. www.siriusxm.com or call1-888-601-6296 (U.S.)

. www.siriusxm.ca or call1-877-438-9677 (Canada)

See Satellite Radio 0 134.

Portable Audio DevicesThis vehicle may have an auxiliaryinput on the center stack and a USBport on the instrument panel.External devices such as an iPod,laptop computer, MP3 player,or USB storage device can beconnected to the auxiliary port usinga 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input cable or theUSB port depending on the audiosystem.

See "Using the Auxiliary Input Jack"and "Using the USB Port" inAuxiliary Devices 0 141.


In Brief 19

BluetoothIf equipped with a Bluetooth system,it allows users with aBluetooth-enabled cell phone tomake and receive hands-free callsusing the vehicle’s audio systemand controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired with the Bluetoothsystem before it can be used in thevehicle. Not all phones will supportall functions. For more information,see www.gm.com/bluetooth andBluetooth 0 146.

Steering Wheel Controls

If equipped with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

w : Press to go to the next favoriteradio station, track on a CD,or folder on an iPod® or USBdevice.

c /x : Press to go to theprevious favorite radio station, trackon a CD, or folder on an iPod® orUSB device. Also press to reject anincoming call, or end a current call.

b / g : Press to silence the vehiclespeakers only. Press again to turnthe sound on. Press and hold longerthan two seconds to interact withOnStar® or Bluetooth systems,if equipped.

+ e : Press to increase volume.

− e : Press to decrease volume.

SRCE : Press to switch betweenthe radio and CD, and for equippedvehicles, the front auxiliary.

¨ : Press to seek to the next radiostation, the next track while sourcedto the CD, or to select tracks andfolders on an iPod® or USB device.

See Steering Wheel Controls 0 90.


20 In Brief

Cruise Control

I : If equipped, press to turncruise control on or off. The whiteindicator comes on in the instrumentcluster when cruise control isturned on.

+RES : If there is a set speed inmemory, press briefly to resume to apreviously set speed, or press andhold to accelerate. If cruise controlis already active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET− : Press briefly to set thespeed and activate cruise control,or press and hold to decelerate.If cruise control is already active,use to decrease vehicle speed.

[ : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control 0 189,if equipped.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If equipped, SBZA will detectmoving vehicles in the next laneover in the vehicle's side blind zonearea. When this happens, the SBZAdisplay will light up in thecorresponding outside side mirrorand will flash if the turn signal is on.

See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)0 193.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If equipped, the RVC displays aview of the area behind the vehiclewhen the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse).

To clean the camera lens, rinse itwith water and wipe it with a softcloth.

See Rear Vision Camera (RVC)0 191.

Parking AssistIf equipped, Rear Parking Assist(RPA) uses sensors on the rearbumper to assist with parking andavoiding objects while inR (Reverse). It operates at speedsless than 8 km/h (5 mph) and usesaudible beeps to provide distanceand system information.

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.

See Parking Assist 0 192.


In Brief 21

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or an MP3player.

The vehicle may have twoaccessory power outlets on theinstrument panel.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

See Power Outlets 0 94.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControlThe vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) that limits wheel spinand the StabiliTrak system thatassists with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.Both systems turn on automaticallyevery time the vehicle is started.

. To turn off TCS, press andrelease g. The appropriateDriver Information Center (DIC)message will display.

. To turn off both TCS andStabiliTrak, press and hold guntil the StabiliTrak OFF lightYilluminates and the appropriateDIC messages display.

. Press and release g again toturn on both systems.

StabiliTrak will automatically turn onif the vehicle exceeds 32 km/h(20 mph). TCS will remain offuntil g is pressed or the ignition iscycled off then on.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 186.


22 In Brief

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 167. Thewarning light will remain on until thetire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that the

tire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System0 262.

Fuel (Gasoline)

Regular Fuel

Use only unleaded gasoline rated87 octane or higher in your vehicle.Do not use gasoline with an octanerating lower as it may result invehicle damage and lower fueleconomy. See Fuel 0 195.

Fuel (Diesel)For diesel vehicles, do not usegasoline. See “Fuel for DieselEngines” in the Duramax dieselsupplement.

E85 or FlexFuel

FlexFuel Possible

Certain models are compatible withE85 fuel. See E85 or FlexFuel0 197.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.


In Brief 23

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Display the OIL LIFEREMAINING on the DIC. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 109.

2. Press and hold V on the DICwhile the Oil Life display isactive. The oil life will changeto 100%.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:


2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds. If thedisplay shows 100%, thesystem is reset.

See Engine Oil Life System 0 220.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.

. Avoid fast starts and acceleratesmoothly.

. Brake gradually and avoidabrupt stops.

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-888-881-3302

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

New GMC owners are automaticallyenrolled in the Roadside AssistanceProgram.

See Roadside Assistance Program0 320.


24 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . 28Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . 30Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 31Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

DoorsSide Door (60/40Swing-Out) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . . 34

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Trailer-Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Interior MirrorsInterior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 37Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . 37

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Swing-Out Windows . . . . . . . . . . . 39Enhanced Technology Glass . . . 39Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keys in theignition, and children or otherscould be caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with theignition key.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 25

{ Warning

If the key is unintentionallyrotated while the vehicle isrunning, the ignition could bemoved out of the RUN position.This could be caused by heavyitems hanging from the key ring,or by large or long items attachedto the key ring that could becontacted by the driver orsteering wheel. If the ignitionmoves out of the RUN position,the engine will shut off, brakingand steering power assist may be

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

impacted, and airbags may notdeploy. To reduce the risk ofunintentional rotation of theignition key, do not change theway the ignition key and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,if equipped, are connected to theprovided key rings.

The ignition key and key rings, andRKE transmitter, if equipped, aredesigned to work together as asystem to reduce the risk ofunintentionally moving the key outof the RUN position. The ignitionkey has a small hole to allowattachment of the provided key ring.It is important that any replacementignition keys have a small hole. Seeyour dealer if a replacement key isrequired.

The combination and size of therings that came with your keys werespecifically selected for yourvehicle. The rings are connected tothe key like two links of a chain to

reduce the risk of unintentionallymoving the key out of the RUNposition. Do not add any additionalitems to the ring attached to theignition key. Attach additional itemsonly to the second ring, and limitadded items to a few essential keysor small, light items no larger thanan RKE transmitter.



Interference from radio-frequencyidentification (RFID) tags mayprevent the key from starting thevehicle. Keep RFID tags away fromthe key when starting the vehicle.

The key is used for the ignition andall door locks.

The key has a bar-coded key tagthat the dealer or qualified locksmithcan use to make new keys. Storethis information in a safe place, notin the vehicle.

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

If it becomes difficult to turn a key,inspect the key blade for debris.Periodically clean with a brushor pick.

If locked out of the vehicle, seeRoadside Assistance Program0 320.

With an active OnStar service plan,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview 0 330.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement0 326.

If there is a decrease in the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) operatingrange:

. Check the distance. Thetransmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationIf equipped, the RKE transmitterfunctions work up to 60 m (197 ft)away from the vehicle.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System 0 26.



RKE Transmitter with RemoteStart Shown

Q : Press once to lock all doors.If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), theparking lamps flash once to indicatelocking has occurred.

The horn may chirp when Q ispressed again within five seconds.See Vehicle Personalization 0 115.

K : Press to unlock the driver door.If K is pressed again withinfive seconds, all remaining doorsunlock.

The interior lamps come on andstay on for 20 seconds or until theignition is turned on. If enabledthrough the DIC, the parking lampsflash twice to indicate unlocking hasoccurred. See VehiclePersonalization 0 115.

j : Press to unlock only the cargodoors.

/ : If equipped, press Q and thenpress and hold/ for at leastfour seconds or until the turn signallamps flash to start the engine fromoutside the vehicle using the RKEtransmitter. See Remote VehicleStart 0 28.

L : Press and release to locatethe vehicle. The turn signal lampsflash and the horn soundsthree times.

Press and holdL for more thantwo seconds to sound the panicalarm. The turn signal lamps flashand the horn sounds repeatedly for30 seconds. The alarm turns off

when the ignition is turned on orLis pressed again. The ignition mustbe off for the panic alarm to work.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to the vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also beprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters no longer work once thenew transmitter is programmed.Each vehicle can have up tofour transmitters programmed to it.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC.



Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object, such as a flathead screwdriver.

. Carefully insert the tool intothe notch located along theparting line of the

transmitter. Do not insertthe tool too far. Stop assoon as resistance is felt.

. Twist the tool until thetransmitter is separated.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace witha CR2032 or equivalentbattery.

4. Snap the transmitter backtogether.

Remote Vehicle StartThis vehicle may have a remotestart feature. This feature allows youto start the engine from outside thevehicle. It may also start thevehicle's heating or air conditioningsystems. See Climate ControlSystems 0 154.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsmay require a person using remotestart to have the vehicle in view

when doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements onremote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start featureif the vehicle is low on fuel. Thevehicle may run out of fuel.

The RKE transmitter range may beless while the vehicle is running.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System 0 26.

/ : This button will be on the RKEtransmitter if the vehicle has remotestart.

To start the engine using the remotestart feature:

1. Press and release Q on thetransmitter.

2. Immediately press and hold /until the turn signal lampsflash. If you cannot see thelamps, press and hold/ for atleast four seconds.



When the engine starts, theparking lamps will turn on andremain on while the engine isrunning. The doors will belocked.

The engine will continue to runfor 10 minutes. After30 seconds, repeat the steps ifa 10-minute extension isdesired. Remote start can beextended only once.

After entering the vehicle during aremote start, turn the ignition on todrive the vehicle.

A maximum of two remote starts ora start with an extension areallowed between ignition cycles.

If the remote start procedure is usedagain before the first 10–minutetime frame has ended, the first10 minutes will immediately expireand the second 10–minute timeframe will start.

After the engine has been remotestarted two times or a start with anextension, the ignition must be

turned on and then off before theremote start procedure can be usedagain.

To cancel a remote start do any ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.


. Turn the ignition on and then off.

The remote vehicle start feature willnot operate if:

. The key is in the ignition.

. The hood is open.

. The hazard warning flashersare on.

. There is an emission controlsystem malfunction. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) 0 103.

. The engine coolant temperatureis too high.

. The oil pressure is low.

. Two remote starts or a start withan extension have already beenprovided.

Door Locks

{ Warning

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily openthe doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When adoor is locked, the handlewill not open it. The chanceof being thrown out of thevehicle in a crash isincreased if the doors arenot locked. So, allpassengers should wearseat belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A childcan be overcome byextreme heat and can suffer

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

permanent injuries or evendeath from heat stroke.Always lock the vehiclewhenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking thedoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

To lock the door from the inside,slide the manual lever on the doordown. To unlock the door, slide themanual lever up.

From the outside, use the key.

If the vehicle is equipped withKeyless Entry, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 26.

Power Door Locks

If equipped, press T to lock orunlock the doors.

When a door is locked, the insidedoor handle will not work.

Cargo Door RelockingIf the cargo door is open when thelock button is pressed on the dooror the RKE transmitter, all doors willlock except the cargo door. Thecargo door will lock immediatelywhen it is closed or when thedelayed locking feature functions.

Delayed LockingWhen locking the doors with thepower lock switch and a door open,the doors will lock five seconds afterthe last door is closed. The hornchirps to signal that the delayedlocking feature is in use.

Pressinge or Q on the RKEtransmitter will override the delayedlocking feature and immediately lockall the doors.

This feature will not operate if thekey is in the ignition.

This feature can be programmedusing the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See “DELAY DOORLOCK” in Vehicle Personalization0 115.



Automatic Door LocksThe vehicle may have an automaticlock/unlock feature. This feature canbe programmed using the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization 0 115.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature protects you fromlocking the key in the vehicle whenthe key is in the ignition and a dooris open.

If the power lock switch is pressedwhen either the driver, passenger,or rear door is open, all the doorswill lock and then the driver door willunlock. This feature does notinclude the side cargo door.

If the vehicle has an ambulancepackage, this feature is disabled.

Safety LocksSecurity locks are located on thefront portion of the 60/40 sideswing-out door or the sidesliding door.

60/40 Swing-Out SideDoor—Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side Similar

For the 60/40 side swing-out door,move the button to the right for thedriver side door or to the left for thepassenger side door to engage thesecurity feature.

Move the button to the left for thedriver side door or to the right forthe passenger side door to returnthe door locks to normal operation.

Side Sliding Door

For the side sliding door, move thebutton up to engage the securityfeature. Move the button down toreturn the door locks to normaloperation.



Doors

Side Door (60/40Swing-Out)

To open the front portion of a60/40 door from the outside, pull outon the handle and open the door.

To open the front portion of a60/40 door from the inside, pull thehandle toward you and push thedoor open.

To open the rear portion of a60/40 door from the outside, pull thehandle on the side of the rear doorand pull the door toward you.

To close the 60/40 side doors, closethe rear door first. Then close thefront door. Check to make sure thatboth doors are completely closed.

The swing-out doors have a checkstrap assembly in the door frame tokeep the door from opening beyond90 degrees.

To open the door beyond90 degrees, close the door partially,pull the check strap toward you andthen open the door. When the dooris closed, the check strap willautomatically re-engage.



Sliding Door

To open the sliding side door fromthe outside, pull the handle towardthe rear of the vehicle and slide thedoor open.

To close the sliding side door fromthe outside, use the handle to slidethe door toward the front of thevehicle.

When the door is closed, it will beflush with the side of the body.

To open the sliding side door fromthe inside, pull the handle towardthe rear of the vehicle. Then, slidethe door toward the rear of thevehicle.

To close the sliding side door fromthe inside, grasp the handle andslide the door toward the front of thevehicle.

Make sure the door is completelyclosed before driving away.

Rear Doors

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily openthe doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. The doorscan be unlocked andopened while the vehicle ismoving. The chance ofbeing thrown out of thevehicle in a crash isincreased if the doors arenot locked. So, allpassengers should wearseat belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A childcan be overcome byextreme heat and can suffer

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

permanent injuries or evendeath from heat stroke.Always lock the vehiclewhenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking thedoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

To open the rear doors from theoutside, pull the handle toward youto open the passenger side reardoor first.

To open the driver side rear door,pull the latch release at the insideedge of the door.

To close the rear doors, close thedriver side rear door first. Thenclose the passenger side rear door.Check to make sure both doors arecompletely closed.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement0 326.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle is equipped with thePASS-Key® III+ (PersonalizedAutomotive Security System)theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key III+ is a passive theftdeterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed from theignition.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The security light will come on ifthere is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.



If the engine does not start and thesecurity light comes on, the key mayhave a damaged transponder. Turnthe ignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key. If the enginestill does not start with the other key,the vehicle needs service. If thevehicle does start, the first key maybe faulty. See your dealer or alocksmith who can service thePASS-Key III+ to have a newkey made.

It is possible for the PASS-Key III+decoder to learn the transpondervalue of a new or replacement key.Up to eight keys may beprogrammed for the vehicle. Thisprocedure is for learning additionalkeys only. If all the currentlyprogrammed keys are lost or do notoperate, you must see your dealeror a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key III+ to have keys madeand programmed to the system.

See your dealer or a locksmith whocan service PASS-Key III+ to get anew key blank that is cut exactly asthe ignition key that operates thesystem.

To program the new key:

1. Verify the new key has 1stamped on it.

2. Insert the original, alreadyprogrammed key into theignition lock cylinder and startthe engine. If the engine willnot start, see your dealer forservice.

3. After the engine has started,turn the ignition off and removethe key.

4. Insert the key to beprogrammed and turn theignition on within 10 seconds ofremoving the previous key.

The security message will turnoff once the key has beenprogrammed. It may not beapparent that the securitymessage went on due to howquickly the key is programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1–4 if additionalkeys are to be programmed.

If you lose or damage aPASS-Key III+ key, see your dealeror a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key III+ to have a newkey made.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.



Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Manual MirrorsAdjust the mirrors by moving themirror up and down and left andright.

The mirrors can be manually foldedin or out.

On the lower portion of each mirroris an auxiliary convex mirror.A convex mirror's surface is curvedso you can see more from the driverseat. The auxiliary convex mirrorscan be adjusted manually bymoving the mirror.

Trailer-Tow Mirrors

Vehicles with towing mirrors can beadjusted manually for a clear viewof the objects behind you.

On the lower portion of each mirrorthere is an auxiliary convex mirrorthat can be adjusted manually toprovide an extended field of view.

The mirrors can be manually foldedin or out.

Power Mirrors

If equipped with power mirrors,select each mirror by turning theknob clockwise for the passengerside mirror or counterclockwise forthe driver side mirror. The centerposition is neutral.

Adjust the mirror angle by movingthe knob in the desired direction.The auxiliary convex mirrors canonly be adjusted manually.



Folding Mirrors

Manual Folding Mirrors

The mirrors can be folded inwardtoward the vehicle to preventdamage when going through anautomatic car wash. Push the mirroroutward to return it to the originalposition.

Side Blind Zone Alert

The vehicle may have Side BlindZone Alert. See Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) 0 193.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

1 : Press to heat the mirrors.

An indicator light in the button lightswhen the outside heated mirrors areactivated.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underClimate Control Systems 0 154.

Interior Mirrors

Interior Rearview MirrorsAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind the vehicle.

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Backup Video Manual Mirror

If equipped, this manual dimmingmirror provides a camera view ofthe area behind the vehicle. Thevideo display feature comes onwhen the vehicle is shifted inR (Reverse), and turns off when thevehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse).

Troubleshooting

If the vehicle is in R (Reverse) anda blue screen is displayed in themirror and then the display shutsoff, see your dealer for service.

See Rear Vision Camera (RVC)0 191.

Manual Rearview MirrorPush the tab forward for daytimeuse and pull it rearward fornighttime use to avoid glare of theheadlamps from behind.

Cargo vans without rear door glassmay not have an inside rearviewmirror.

Backup Video Manual Mirror

If equipped, this manual dimmingmirror provides a camera view ofthe area behind the vehicle. Thevideo display feature comes onwhen the vehicle is shifted inR (Reverse), and turns off when thevehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse).

Troubleshooting




Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

Manual WindowsOperate the manual windows byturning the hand crank on each doorto raise or lower the side doorwindows.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave keys in a vehicle withchildren. See Keys 0 24.

If equipped, power windows workwhen the ignition is on, in ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 175.

Using the window switch, press toopen or pull to close the window.

The windows may be temporarilydisabled if they are used repeatedlywithin a short time.

Express-Down

The driver window switch has anexpress-down feature that allowsthe window to be lowered without



holding the switch. Press fully andrelease the switch marked AUTO toactivate the express-down mode.This mode can be canceled at anytime by pulling up on the switch. Toopen the window part way, lightlytap the switch until the window is atthe desired position.

Swing-Out Windows

Side Swing-Out Window

To open the side door swing-outwindow, pull up on the latch at theedge of the window. Swing thewindow out and push down on thelatch to lock the window into place.

To close the window, pull the latchtoward you and push down on thelatch to lock it.

Rear Swing‐Out Windows

The vehicle also has rear swing‐outwindows. The rear swing-outwindows work the same way as theside swing‐out window, but the latchis located at the bottom edge of thewindow.

Enhanced TechnologyGlassThe vehicle may be equipped withEnhanced Technology Glass (ETG).ETG is part of the overall occupantprotection system on passenger andcrew vans. ETG may help keeppassengers sitting next to thesefixed windows from being ejectedthrough the glass in some, but notall crashes. Even with this glass,seat belts must still be worn at alltimes. For passenger and crewvans, use only ETG glass approvedfor the vehicle for replacement whendamaged.

The following table shows laminatedglass location, based on vehiclemodel and options.



Vehicle Configuration ETG Locations

Passenger Vans with five or moreseating positions

Sliding door forward window (ifequipped) and rear-most sidewindows

Long Wheelbase Cargo Vans Rear-most side windows

Crew VansSliding door forward window (ifequipped) and rear-most sidewindows.

Rear Windows

Rear Side Door Windows(Cargo Van Only)

{ Warning

The vehicle may have a partitionbehind the front seats or verticalmetal panels on the inside of therear side door windows. Theseare part of the occupantprotection system. Do notremove them.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, swing down thesun visors. You can also swing themto the side.

Visor Vanity Mirror

The vehicle may have visor vanitymirrors, with or without lamps. Liftthe mirror cover to turn the lampson, if equipped.


Seats and Restraints 41

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . 42Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Seat BeltsSeat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47How to Wear Seat BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Seat Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 55Seat Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Replacing Seat Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . 58When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . 63Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 66

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . . . 67Replacing Airbag System Partsafter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Infants and Young Children . . . . 69Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . 72Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . 73Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) . . . . 75

Replacing LATCH System PartsAfter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in theRear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in theFront Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83


42 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsOn vehicles with factory installedseats, the front seats have built-inhead restraints that are notadjustable in the outboard seatingpositions.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust the seat:

1. Lift the bar under the frontedge of the seat cushion tounlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure the seat islocked in place.

Power Seat Adjustment

To adjust a power seat, if available,use the controls on the front ofthe seat:


Seats and Restraints 43. Move the center knob to the

right or left to move the seatforward or rearward.

. Move the center knob up ordown to raise or lower the seat.

. Move the right or left lever up ordown to raise or lower the frontor rear of the seat cushion.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever on the inboardside of the seat.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.


To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the seat belts cannot dotheir job.

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear theseat belt properly.



Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Rear SeatsRemoving the Rear Seat

Disconnect the mini-latch plates forthe lap-shoulder belts on the benchseat to be removed.

1. To do this, press the tip of akey into the release hole of theseat belt buckle while pullingup on the seat belt.

2. Locate the pins.

On a three-passenger seatthere are two pins on theinboard sides of the rear seats.

Three-Passenger Seat

The left side pin has a gray capwith a black “L” marked on it.




The right side pin has ablack cap with a white “R”marked on it.

On a four-passenger seat,each half of the seat has a setof pins. The left side has a setmarked “L”, and the right sidehas a set marked “R”.

If the vehicle has floor mats,the pins are under a flap thathas been cut into the mat.

3. Pull the pin handle up todisengage the pin from theretaining clip, and then pull thepin out.

4. Repeat this procedure for theother pins.

5. Pull the seat rearward about5 cm (2 in), and then lift theseat from the floor rails.

6. Remove the seat from thevehicle.

7. For the second and third rowseats, stow the seat belt latchby attaching the clip on theseat belt latch to the trim justinside the side door.

For the last row of seats, stowthe seat belt latch plate on theclip at the window trim. Roll themini-latch into the seat beltwebbing and then hook theseat belt latch plate on the clip.

Reinstalling the Rear Seats

{ Warning

A seat that is not locked intoplace properly can move aroundin a collision or sudden stop.People in the vehicle could be

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

injured. Be sure to lock the seatinto place properly wheninstalling it.

{ Warning

A seat belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the seat belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

1. Position the seat into the openslots in both rails. Push theseat forward in the rail, hookingboth seat bases onto the pinsinside of the rails.

2. Locate the hole in the rail toinstall the locking pins at therear of the seat base. If thevehicle has floor mats, pull theflap that has been cut intothe mat.

3. Insert the locking pins into theseat base and push the seat toline up the pins with the base.

On a three-passenger seat, thepin with the black capmarked “R” must be installedon the right side and the pinwith the gray cap marked “L”must be installed on theleft side.

On a four-passenger seat, thepins marked “R” must beinstalled on the half of the seaton the right side. The pinsmarked “L” must be installed onthe half of the seat on theleft side.


4. Push the pin(s) marked “R”down until they are in theretaining clip.




5. Push the pin(s) marked “L”down until they are in theretaining clip.

6. If the vehicle has a floor mat,put the flap back to its originalposition.

7. Repeat this procedure for theother seat base.

8. Connect the mini-latch platesfor the lap-shoulder belts byinserting the latch plates intothe mini-buckles attached atthe outboard positions of thebench seat. Do not twist thebelts.

9. Check that all locking pins arelocked into place beforeoperating the vehicle.

Seat BeltsThis section describes how to useseat belts properly, and some thingsnot to do.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where aseat belt cannot be worn properly.In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingseat belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingseat belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allow

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

passengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and seat belts.

Always wear a seat belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the seat belts.See Seat Belt Reminders 0 101.

Why Seat Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the seat belts!

When you wear a seat belt, you andthe vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the seatbelts. That is why wearing seat beltsmakes such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSeat Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing aseat belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a seat belt or not. Yourchance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear seatbelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only. They work withseat belts— not instead of them.Whether or not an airbag isprovided, all occupants still haveto buckle up to get the mostprotection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing seat belts.

How to Wear Seat BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout seat belts and children, andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren 0 68 or Infants and YoungChildren 0 69. Follow those rules foreveryone's protection.



It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing seat belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a seat belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,

this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour seat belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulderbelt under both arms orbehind your back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt. If you areusing a rear seating position with adetachable seat belt and the seatbelt is not attached, see“Reinstalling the Rear Seats” underRear Seats 0 44 for instructions onreconnecting the seat belt to themini-buckle.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see“Seats” in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lockif you pull the belt across youvery quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly tounlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.



If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may beengaged. If this happens, letthe belt go back all the wayand start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If thebelt is not long enough, seeSeat Belt Extender 0 55.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the seat beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you.See “Seat belt Height Adjuster”later in this section forinstructions on use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullstitching on the seat beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position. Slidethe latch plate up the seat beltwebbing when the seat belt is not inuse. The latch plate should rest onthe stitching on the seat belt, nearthe guide loop on the side wall.

Always stow the seat belt slowly.If the seat belt webbing returnsquickly to the stowed position, the



retractor may lock and cannot bepulled out. If this happens, pull theseat belt straight out firmly to unlockthe webbing, and then release it.If the webbing is still locked in theretractor, see your dealer.

Before a door is closed, be sure theseat belt is out of the way. If a dooris slammed against a seat belt,damage can occur to both the seatbelt and the vehicle.

Seat Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a seat belt heightadjuster for the driver and frontoutboard passenger positions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe seat belt in a crash. See How toWear Seat Belts Properly 0 48.

Squeeze both sides of the releasebutton and pull outward. Then movethe height adjuster up or down tothe desired position and release thebutton.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it up ordown without squeezing the releasebutton to make sure it has lockedinto position.

Seat Belt Pretensioners

If the vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact airbags and roof-rail airbags,it also has seat belt pretensionersfor the front outboard occupants.

Although the seat belt pretensionerscannot be seen, they are part of theseat belt assembly. They can helptighten the seat belts during theearly stages of a moderate tosevere frontal, near frontal, or rearcrash if the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met.And, if the vehicle has roof-railairbags, seat belt pretensioners canhelp tighten the seat belts in a sidecrash or a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and probablyother parts of the vehicle’s seat beltsystem will need to be replaced.See Replacing Seat Belt SystemParts after a Crash 0 55.

Do not sit on the outboard seat beltwhile entering or exiting the vehicleor at any time while sitting in theseat. Sitting on the seat belt candamage the webbing and hardware.

Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides

This vehicle may have rear seat beltcomfort guides. The guides mayprovide added seat belt comfort for



older children who have outgrownbooster seats and for some adults.When installed and properlyadjusted, the comfort guidepositions the shoulder belt awayfrom the neck and head.

The comfort guides for the right rearoutboard seating positions ofthree-passenger bench seats arestored in a pocket on the side of theseatback.

Adjustable comfort guides areavailable through your dealer for theleft rear outboard seating positionsof the three-passenger bench seatsand for the outboard seatingpositions of the four-passengerbench seats. For these seatingpositions, the adjustable comfortguide attaches to a loop on theoutboard side of the seatback.

Comfort Guide Installation andRemoval (Pocket Style)

To install:

1. Locate the guide in a pocket onthe side of the seatback.



2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be behind thebelt with the plastic guide onthe front.

{ Warning

A seat belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and releasethe seat belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure that the shoulder beltcrosses the shoulder. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the seat belt can beremoved from the guide. Slide theguide back into its storage pocketon the side of the seatback.



Comfort Guide Installation andRemoval (Adjustable Style)

{ Warning

A seat belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

Adjustable comfort guides areavailable through your dealer for theleft rear outboard seating positionsof the three-passenger bench seatsand for the outboard seatingpositions of the four-passengerbench seats. Instructions areincluded with the guides.

Seat Belt Use DuringPregnancySeat belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear seat belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a seatbelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making seatbelts effective is wearing themproperly.



Seat Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's seat belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a seat belt is not long enough,your dealer will order you anextender. When you go in to order it,take the heaviest coat you will wear,so the extender will be long enoughfor you. To help avoid personalinjury, do not let someone else useit, and use it only for the seat it ismade to fit. The extender has beendesigned for adults. Never use it forsecuring child restraints. For moreinformation on the proper use and fitof seat belt extenders see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckPeriodically check the seat beltreminder, seat belts, buckles, latchplates, retractors, shoulder beltheight adjusters (if equipped), andseat belt anchorages to make surethey are all in working order. Lookfor any other loose or damaged seatbelt system parts that might keep a

seat belt system from performingproperly. See your dealer to have itrepaired. Torn or frayed seat beltsmay not protect you in a crash.They can rip apart under impactforces. If a belt is torn or frayed,have it replaced immediately.

Make sure the seat belt reminderlight is working. See Seat BeltReminders 0 101.

Keep seat belts clean and dry. SeeSeat Belt Care 0 55.

Seat Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye seat beltwebbing. It may severely weakenthe webbing. In a crash, theymight not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean andrinse seat belt webbing only withmild soap and lukewarm water.Allow the webbing to dry.

Seat belts should be properly caredfor and maintained.

Seat belt hardware should be keptdry and free of dust or debris. Asnecessary exterior hard surfacesand seat belt webbing may be lightlycleaned with mild soap and water.Ensure there is not excessive dustor debris in the mechanism. If dustor debris exists in the system pleasesee the dealer. Parts may need tobe replaced to ensure properfunctionality of the system.

Replacing Seat BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the seat beltsystem in the vehicle. A damagedseat belt system may not properlyprotect the person using it,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the seat belt systems are

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

working properly after a crash,have them inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofseat belts may not be necessary.But the seat belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the seatbelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the seat beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the seat belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 101.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbag:

. A frontal airbag for the driver

The vehicle may have the followingairbags:

. A frontal airbag for the frontoutboard passenger

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the front outboardpassenger

Seat-mounted side impactairbags are only available onvehicles equipped with roof-railairbags.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driveron vans with single row seating

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger on vanswith single row seating

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver onvans with two row seating

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger on vans with two rowseating

If the van is equipped with asliding door, the roof-rail airbagfor the front outboard passengeris separate from the roof-railairbag for the passenger seateddirectly behind the front outboardpassenger. If the van isequipped with a 60/40 swing-outdoor, a single roof-rail airbagcovers both seating positions.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the second and third rowpassengers seated directlybehind the driver on vans withthree or more seating rows

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thesecond and third row



passengers seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger on vans with three ormore seating rows

If the van is equipped with asliding door, the roof-rail airbagfor the front outboard passengeris separate from the roof-railairbag for the second and thirdrow passengers seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger. If the van isequipped with a 60/40 swing-outdoor, a single roof-rail airbagcovers all three seatingpositions.

Additionally:

. Vehicles that have a raised ormodified roof— such as schoolbuses, ambulances, vehicleswith adaptive equipment formobility, and recreationalvehicles—may or may not beequipped with roof-rail airbags.

. Vehicles with a GVWR above4 536 kg (10,000 lb) are notequipped with roof-rail airbags.

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on anattached label near the deploymentopening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by seatbelts. Even though today’s airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating airbag, all airbags mustinflate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your seat belt, even withairbags. Airbags are designed towork with seat belts, not replacethem. Also, airbags are notdesigned to inflate in every crash.In some crashes seat belts arethe only restraint. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? 0 60.

Wearing your seat belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe seat belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a seat beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.



{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to, anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Seat belts help keep youin position before and during acrash. Always wear a seat belt,even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle. The seat belts andthe front outboard passengerairbags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back andupright in the seat with both feeton the floor.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children 0 68 orInfants and Young Children 0 69.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 101.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.



If the vehicle has a front outboardpassenger frontal airbag, it is in thepassenger side instrument panel.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

If the vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact airbags for the driver andfront outboard passenger, they arein the sides of the seatbacks closestto the door.


If the vehicle has a single seatingrow and it has roof-rail airbags forthe driver and front outboardpassenger, the roof-rail airbags arein the ceiling above the sidewindows.




If the vehicle has two seating rows,roof-rail airbags for the driver, frontoutboard passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.If the vehicle has three or moreseating rows, roof-rail airbags forthe driver, front outboard passenger,and second and third row outboardpassengers are in the ceiling abovethe side windows.

{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped with one ormore airbags. See Airbag System0 56. Airbags are designed to inflateif the impact exceeds the specificairbag system's deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants. The vehicle haselectronic sensors which help theairbag system determine theseverity of the impact. Deploymentthresholds can vary with specificvehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver or frontoutboard passenger head andchest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.



It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

Seat-mounted side impact airbags,if equipped, are designed to inflatein moderate to severe side crashesdepending on the location of theimpact. Seat-mounted side impactairbags are not designed to inflate infrontal impacts, near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis intended to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.

The vehicle may or may not beequipped with roof-rail airbags.Roof-rail airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe side

crashes depending on the locationof the impact. In addition, theseroof-rail airbags are designed toinflate during a rollover. Roof-railairbags are not designed to inflate infrontal, near-frontal, or rear impacts.All roof-rail airbags will inflate wheneither side of the vehicle is struck orif the sensing system predicts thatthe vehicle is about to roll over onits side.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Arethe Airbags? 0 58.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by seat belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst, second, and third rows,if equipped. The rollover capableroof-rail airbags are designed tohelp reduce the risk of full or partialejection in rollover events, althoughno system can prevent all suchejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion is



not toward those airbags. SeeWhen Should an Airbag Inflate?0 60.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto seat belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After frontal and seat-mounted sideimpact airbags (if equipped) inflate,they quickly deflate, so quickly thatsome people may not even realizethe airbags inflated. Roof-railairbags (if equipped) may still be atleast partially inflated for some timeafter they inflate. Some componentsof the airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 58.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out of

the windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors(if equipped with power door locks),turn on the interior lamps andhazard warning flashers, and shutoff the fuel system after the airbags

inflate. The feature may alsoactivate, without airbag inflation,after an event that exceeds apredetermined threshold. Afterturning the ignition off and then onagain, the fuel system will return tonormal operation; the doors can belocked, the interior lamps can beturned off, and the hazard warningflashers can be turned off using thecontrols for those features. If any ofthese systems are damaged in thecrash they may not operate asnormal.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.

. Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy 0 328and Event Data Recorders0 328.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Airbag On-Off SwitchIf the instrument panel has one ofthe switches pictured in thefollowing illustrations, the vehiclehas an airbag on-off switch that youcan use to manually turn on or offthe front outboard passenger airbag.No other airbag is affected by theairbag on-off switch.

United States

Canada



This switch should only be turned tothe off position if the person in thefront outboard passenger position isa member of a passenger risk groupidentified by the nationalgovernment as follows:

Infant. An infant (less than1 year old) must ride in the frontseat because:

. My vehicle has no rear seat;

. My vehicle has a rear seat toosmall to accommodate arear-facing infant seat; or

. The infant has a medicalcondition which, according to theinfant's physician, makes itnecessary for the infant to ride inthe front seat so that the drivercan constantly monitor thechild's condition.

Child age 1 to 12. A childage 1 to 12 must ride in the frontseat because:

. My vehicle has no rear seat;

. Although children ages 1 to 12ride in the rear seat(s) wheneverpossible, children ages 1 to 12

sometimes must ride in the frontbecause no space is available inthe rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or

. The child has a medicalcondition which, according to thechild's physician, makes itnecessary for the child to ride inthe front seat so that the drivercan constantly monitor thechild's condition.

Medical Condition. A passengerhas a medical condition which,according to his or her physician:

. Causes the passenger airbag topose a special risk for thepassenger; and

. Makes the potential harm fromthe passenger airbag in a crashgreater than the potential harmfrom turning off the airbag andallowing the passenger, even ifbelted, to hit the instrumentpanel or windshield in a crash.

{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is turned off for aperson who is not in a risk groupidentified by the nationalgovernment, that person will nothave the extra protection of anairbag. In a crash, the airbag willnot be able to inflate and helpprotect the person sitting there.Do not turn off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag unlessthe person sitting there is in a riskgroup.



United States

Canada

To turn off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag, insert theignition key into the switch, push in,and move the switch to the offposition.

The airbag off light will come on andstay on to let you know the frontoutboard passenger airbag is off.See Airbag On-Off Light 0 102. Thefront outboard passenger airbag willremain off until you turn it back onagain.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. Forexample, the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag couldinflate even though the airbagon-off switch is turned off.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

To help avoid injury to yourself orothers, have the vehicle servicedright away. See Airbag ReadinessLight 0 101 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

United States



Canada

To turn the front outboard passengerairbag on again, insert the ignitionkey into the switch, push in, andmove the switch to the on position.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is now enabled, andmay inflate. See Airbag On-Off Light0 102.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Your

dealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation 0 325.

{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheetmetal may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly.

The operation of the airbag systemcan also be affected by changingany parts of the front seats, seatbelts, airbag sensing and diagnosticmodule, steering wheel, instrumentpanel, inner door seals including thespeakers, any of the airbagmodules, ceiling or pillar garnishtrim, front sensors, or airbag wiring.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels 0 271 for additionalimportant information.



If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability andyou have questions about whetherthe modifications will affect thevehicle's airbag system, or if youhave questions about whether theairbag system will be affected if thevehicle is modified for any otherreason, call Customer Assistance.See Customer Assistance Offices0 318.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 101.

Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbagmay not work properly. Do notopen or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbagcovering and/or airbag modulereplaced. For the location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 58. See your dealerfor service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot properly protect you and your

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

passenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 101.



Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle’s seat belts.

The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:

. Sit all the way back on the seat.Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear seat beltcomfort guide, if available. See“Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 49.If a comfort guide is notavailable, or if the shoulder beltstill does not rest on theshoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper seat belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear seat belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Seat Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt0 49.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use seat beltsproperly.



{ Warning

Never allow more than one childto wear the same seat belt. Theseat belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A seat belt mustbe used by only one person ata time.

{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear theseat belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.



{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Never leave children unattendedin a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the seatbelts.

Every time infants and youngchildren ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided by

appropriate child restraints. Neitherthe vehicle's seat belt system nor itsairbag system is designed for them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant or child should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the frontoutboard seat. Secure arear-facing child restraint in a rearseat. It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in arear seat. If you must secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go.



Child restraints are devices used torestrain, seat, or position children inthe vehicle and are sometimescalled child seats or car seats.

There are three basic types ofchild restraints:

. Forward-facing child restraints

. Rearward-facing child restraints

. Belt-positioning booster seats

The proper child restraint for yourchild depends on their size, weight,and age, and also on whether thechild restraint is compatible with thevehicle in which it will be used.

For each type of child restraint,there are many different modelsavailable. When purchasing a childrestraint, be sure it is designed to beused in a motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label saying thatit meets federal motor vehicle safetystandards. The restraintmanufacturer's instructions thatcome with the restraint state theweight and height limitations for aparticular child restraint. In addition,there are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children with specialneeds.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury in a crash, infants andtoddlers should be secured in arear-facing child restraint until agetwo, or until they reach themaximum height and weight limitsof their child restraint.

{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularseat belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.



Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Restraint

A rear-facing child restraint providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

Forward-Facing Child Restraint

A forward-facing child restraintprovides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

Booster Seats

A belt-positioning booster seat isused for children who haveoutgrown their forward-facing childrestraint. Boosters are designed toimprove the fit of the vehicle's seatbelt system until the child is largeenough for the vehicle seat belts tofit properly without a booster seat.See the seat belt fit test in OlderChildren 0 68.



Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle’s seat belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraints mustbe secured in vehicle seats by lapbelts or the lap belt portion of alap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCHsystem. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 75 for more information.Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPST

availability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in an appropriatechild restraint secured in a rearseating position.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.



If a child restraint is secured in thefront outboard passenger seat, andthe vehicle has a switch on theinstrument panel to manually turn offthe front outboard passenger airbag,see Airbag On-Off Switch 0 63 andSecuring Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 81 orSecuring Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Front Seat) 0 83 formore information, includingimportant safety information.

Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front. This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is sogreat if the airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facing

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

child restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

Even if the airbag switch hasturned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

When securing a child restraint withthe seat belts in a rear seat position,study the instructions that came withthe child restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent seat belts orLATCH anchors for additionalpassengers or child restraints.Adjacent seating positions shouldnot be used if the child restraintprevents access to or interferes withthe routing of the seat belt.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.



Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the childrestraint system and secure thechild restraint system properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in thevehicle. The LATCH system isdesigned to make installation of achild restraint easier.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. LATCH-compatiblerear-facing and forward-facing childseats can be properly installedusing either the LATCH anchors orthe vehicle’s seat belts. Do not useboth the seat belts and the LATCHanchorage system to secure arear-facing or forward-facingchild seat.

Booster seats use the vehicle’s seatbelts to secure the child and thebooster seat. If the manufacturerrecommends that the booster seatbe secured with the LATCH system,this can be done as long as thebooster seat can be positionedproperly and there is no interferencewith the proper positioning of thelap-shoulder belt on the child.

Make sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint,and also the instructions in thismanual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or the seatbelts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

The LATCH anchorage system canbe used until the combined weightof the child plus the child restraint is29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the seat beltalone instead of the LATCHanchorage system once thecombined weight is more than29.5 kg (65 lbs).

See Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 81or Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the Front Seat)0 83.

Child restraints built after March2014 will be labeled with thespecific child weight up to which theLATCH system can be used toinstall the restraint.

The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.



Not all vehicle seating positionshave lower anchors. In this case,the seat belt must be used (with toptether where available) to securethe child restraint. See SecuringChild Restraints (With the Seat Beltin the Rear Seat) 0 81 or SecuringChild Restraints (With the Seat Beltin the Front Seat) 0 83.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3,4) is used to securethe top of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment hook (2) on the childrestraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order toreduce the forward movement androtation of the child restraint duringdriving or in a crash.

The child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a single attachmenthook (2) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached.In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Second, Third, and Fourth Rowwith Three-Passenger Seat



i : Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j : Seating positions with two loweranchors.

See the information following forinstalling a child restraint with a toptether in the second, third, andfourth row center positions.

Never install two top tethers usingthe same top tether anchor.

Front Passenger Position

i : Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

The second, third, and fourth rowwith three-passenger seats haveexposed metal lower anchors in thecrease between the seatback andthe seat cushion.

Second, Third, and Fourth Rowwith Three-PassengerSeat—Passenger Van

There are two top tether anchors inthe second, third, and fourth rowthree-passenger seats. To install achild restraint in the rear driver-side

seating positions, use anchorpoint (1). To install a child restraintin the rear passenger-side seatingpositions, use anchor point (2).To install a child restraint in the rearcenter seating positions, use anchorpoint (2). Never install two toptethers using the same top tetheranchor.

If the vehicle is equipped with afour-passenger fourth or fifth rowseat, it does not have upper orlower anchors. If a child restraint isplaced in the four-passenger fourthor fifth row seat, it must be securedusing the vehicle seat belts.See Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 81or Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the Front Seat)0 83.



Front Passenger Position

There is a top tether anchor for thefront passenger position with a frontpassenger seat. The anchor is atthe rear of the seat cushion on theright front passenger seat.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a child

restraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint 0 73 for additionalinformation.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ Warning

A child could be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly attachedto the vehicle using either theLATCH anchors or the vehicleseat belt. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraintand the instructions in thismanual.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of serious orfatal injuries during a crash, donot attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Buckle any unused seat beltsbehind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,and tighten the belt behind thechild restraint after the childrestraint has been installed.

Caution

Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s seat belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled seat belts to avoidrubbing the LATCH attachments.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

Do not fold the rear seatbackwhen the seat is occupied. Do notfold the empty rear seat with aseat belt buckled. This coulddamage the seat belt or the seat.Unbuckle and return the seat beltto its stowed position, beforefolding the seat.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 73.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe seat belts. Refer to thechild restraint manufacturerinstructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchorsfor the desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten thelower attachments on thechild restraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraintmanufacturer recommends thatthe top tether be attached,attach and tighten the toptether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the childrestraint instructions and thefollowing steps:

2.1. Find the top tetheranchor.

2.2. For the second, third, andfourth row withthree-passenger seatsonly, in the reardriver-side seatingpositions, use anchorpoint (1). For the rearpassenger-side seatingpositions, use anchor



point (2). For the centerseating positions, useanchor point (2). Neverinstall two top tethersusing the same top tetheranchor.

2.3. Route and tighten the toptether according to yourchild restraint instructionsand the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraintand you are using asingle tether, route thetether over the seatback.

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetherover the seatback.

If the position you areusing has an integratedheadrest or head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetheraround the headrest orhead restraint.

If the position you areusing has an integratedheadrest or head restraintand you are using asingle tether, route thetether over the headrestor head restraint.



3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the LATCH path and attemptto move it side to side andback and forth. There shouldbe no more than 2.5 cm (1 in)of movement for properinstallation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in theRear Seat)When securing a child restraint withthe seat belts in a rear seat position,study the instructions that came withthe child restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 75 for how and where toinstall the child restraint usingLATCH. If a child restraint is securedin the vehicle using a seat belt andit uses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 75 for top tetheranchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

If the child restraint or vehicle seatposition does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the seatbelt to secure the child restraint.Be sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint 0 73.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle’s seat beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.




Position the release button onthe buckle, away from the childrestraint system, so that theseat belt could be quicklyunbuckled if necessary.

4. Pull the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt, and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down onthe child restraint as youtighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.



6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 75.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the seat belt path andattempt to move it side to sideand back and forth. When thechild restraint is properlyinstalled, there should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle seat belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in theFront Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 73.

There may be a switch on theinstrument panel that you can use toturn off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag. SeeAirbag On-Off Switch 0 63 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front. This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is sogreat if the airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

rear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

Even if the airbag switch hasturned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.



{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. Forexample, the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag couldinflate even though the airbagon-off switch is turned off.


If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.

If the child restraint uses a toptether, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 75 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

When using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint in thisposition, follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint and thefollowing instructions:

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.Move the seat upward or theseatback to an upright position,

if needed, to get a tightinstallation of the childrestraint.

When the airbag off switch hasturned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag, theoff indicator in the airbag offlight should light and stay litwhen you start the vehicle. SeeAirbag On-Off Light 0 102.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle’s seat beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.




Position the release button onthe buckle, away from the childrestraint system, so that theseat belt could be quicklyunbuckled if necessary.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt, and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down onthe child restraint as youtighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.



7. If the vehicle does not have arear seat and the child restraintmanufacturer recommendsusing a top tether anchor,attach the top tether to the toptether anchor. Refer to theinstructions that came with thechild restraint and to LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 75.

8. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the seat belt path andattempt to move it side to sideand back and forth. When thechild restraint is properlyinstalled, there should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle seat belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

If you turned the airbag off with theswitch, turn on the front outboardpassenger airbag when you remove

the child restraint from the vehicleunless the person who will be sittingthere is a member of a passengerairbag risk group. See AirbagOn-Off Switch 0 63 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.


Storage 87

Storage

Storage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . . 87Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

StorageCompartments

{ Warning

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in storage compartments.In a crash, these objects maycause the cover to open andcould result in injury.

Front StorageThis vehicle may have a frontstorage compartment. It is located atthe center of the instrument panelextension, by the floor. To open thecompartment, pull up on the latch.The compartment will openautomatically.

Storage compartments may also beincluded on the inside of eachfront door.

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Tie-Downs

If equipped, there are six cargotie-downs in the cargo area that canbe used to secure cargo.

Do not apply a total load of morethan 5 000 N (1,124 lbs of force) toa single cargo tie-down whensecuring cargo.

See Vehicle Load Limits 0 167.


88 Storage

{ Warning

The child restraint top tether strapmay be damaged by contact withitems in the cargo area. Your childcould be seriously injured or killedin a collision if the top tether strapis damaged. Properly secure allcargo.

{ Warning

Properly secure all cargo withropes or straps to help prevent itfrom sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than theseatbacks. In a sudden stop orcollision, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury. Usesuitable ropes or straps to securecargo.

{ Warning

Never allow anyone to ride in thecargo area. It is extremelydangerous to ride in the cargoarea of a vehicle. In a collision,people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injuredor killed.

Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of the vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seatbelts. Be sure everyone in thevehicle is in a seat and using aseat belt properly.


Instruments and Controls 89

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . . 89Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . 90Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . 91Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Engine Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . 99Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . 101

Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . 101Airbag On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . 102Charging System Light . . . . . . . 103Malfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) . . . . . . . . 103

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . 106StabiliTrak OFF Light . . . . . . . . . 106Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . 107Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 108Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 108Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 109Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . 109

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Engine Power Messages . . . . . 114Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . . 114

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 115

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

For vehicles with a tilt steeringwheel, the lever is located on theleft side of the steering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever to move thesteering wheel up or down intoa comfortable position.

2. Release the lever to lock thesteering wheel in place.


90 Instruments and Controls

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Steering Wheel Controls

If equipped, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

w : Press to go to the next favoriteradio station, track on a CD,or folder on an iPod or USB device.

c /x : Press to go to theprevious favorite radio station, trackon a CD, or folder on an iPod orUSB device. Also press to reject anincoming call or end a current call.

Radio

To select preset or favorite radiostations:

Press and releasew orc /x togo to the next or previous radiostation stored as a preset orfavorite.

CD

To select tracks on a CD:

Press and releasew orc /x togo to the next or previous track.

Selecting Tracks on an iPod orUSB Device

1. Press and holdw orc /xwhile listening to a song untilthe contents of the currentfolder appear on theinfotainment display.

2. Press and releasew orc /x to scroll up or downthe list, then press andholdw , or press ¨ to play thehighlighted track.

Navigating Folders on an iPod orUSB Device

1. Press and holdw orc /xwhile listening to a song untilthe contents of the currentfolder appear on theinfotainment display.

2. Press and holdc /x to goback to the previous folder list.

3. Press and releasew orc /x to scroll up or downthe list.

. To select a folder, pressand holdw , or press ¨when the folder ishighlighted.

. To go back further in thefolder list, press and holdc /x.

b / g : Press to silence the vehiclespeakers only. Press again to turnthe sound on.



For vehicles with Bluetooth orOnStar systems, press and hold forlonger than two seconds to interactwith those systems.See Bluetooth 0 146 and OnStarOverview 0 330, if equipped.

SRCE : Press to switch betweenthe radio and CD, and for equippedvehicles, the front auxiliary.

¨ : Press to go to the next radiostation while in AM, FM,or SiriusXM, if equipped.

If equipped with a CD player orUSB port:

Press ¨ to go to the next track orchapter while sourced to the CD.

Press ¨ to select a track or a folderwhen navigating folders on an iPodor USB device.

While listening to a CD, press andhold ¨ to quickly move forwardthrough the tracks. Release to stopon the desired track.

+ e : Press to increase volume.

− e : Press to decrease volume.

HornPress the horn symbol on thesteering wheel to sound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The lever is on the left side of thesteering column.

Turn the band withN on it to selectthe wiper speed.

8 : Use for a single wipe. Hold theband onz , then release. For

several wipes, hold the band onzlonger.

6 : Use to adjust the delay timebetween wipes. Turn the band upfor more frequent wipes or down forless frequent wipes.

d : Fast wipes.

a : Slow wipes.

9 : Use to turn the wipers off.

When driving during the day and thewipers are activated, the headlampsautomatically turn on aftercompleting eight wipe cycles.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged blades shouldbe replaced.

Windshield Washer

The windshield wiper paddle is ontop of the turn signal lever.

L : Push the paddle to spraywasher fluid on the windshield. Thewipers will clear the window andthen either stop or return to thepreset speed.



{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

CompassThis vehicle may have a compass inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).

Compass Zone

Your dealer will set the correct zonefor your location.

Under certain circumstances, suchas during a long distancecross-country trip or moving to anew state or province, it will benecessary to compensate forcompass variance by resetting thezone through the DIC if the zone isnot set correctly.

Compass variance is the differencebetween the earth's magnetic northand true geographic north. If thecompass is not set to the zonewhere you live, the compass maygive false readings. The compassmust be set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is traveling.

To adjust for compass variance, usethe following procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure

1. Do not set the compass zonewhen the vehicle is moving.Only set it when the vehicle isin P (Park).

PressT until PRESS V TOCHANGE COMPASS ZONEdisplays.

2. Find the vehicle's currentlocation and variance zonenumber on the map.

Zones 1 through 15 areavailable.

3. Press V to scroll through andselect the appropriatevariance zone.

4. Press3 until the vehicleheading, for example, N forNorth, is displayed in the DIC.

5. If calibration is necessary,calibrate the compass. See“Compass CalibrationProcedure” following.



Compass Calibration

The compass can be manuallycalibrated. Only calibrate thecompass in a magnetically cleanand safe location, such as an openparking lot, where driving thevehicle in circles is not a danger.It is suggested to calibrate awayfrom tall buildings, utility wires,manhole covers, or other industrialstructures, if possible.

If CAL should ever appear in theDIC display, the compass should becalibrated.

If the DIC display does not show aheading, for example, N for North,or the heading does not changeafter making turns, there may be astrong magnetic field interfering withthe compass. Such interferencemay be caused by a magnetic CB orcell phone antenna mount, amagnetic emergency light, magneticnote pad holder, or any othermagnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,move the magnetic item, then turnon the vehicle and calibrate thecompass.

To calibrate the compass, use thefollowing procedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure

1. Before calibrating the compass,make sure the compass zoneis set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is located.See “Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure” earlier in thissection.

Do not operate any switchessuch as window, climatecontrols, seats, etc. during thecalibration procedure.

2. PressT until PRESS V TOCALIBRATE COMPASSdisplays.

3. Press V to start the compasscalibration.

4. The DIC will displayCALIBRATING: DRIVE INCIRCLES. Drive the vehicle intight circles at less than 8 km/h(5 mph) to complete thecalibration. The DIC will displayCALIBRATION COMPLETE fora few seconds when the

calibration is complete. TheDIC display will then return toPRESS V TO CALIBRATECOMPASS.

Clock

Setting the Time or Date

1. With the radio on, press H andthe HR, MIN, MM, DD, andYYYY (hour, minute, month,day, and year) display.

2. Press the softkey under anyone of the tabs to be changed.Every time the softkey ispressed again, the time or thedate if selected, increasesby one.

Another way to increase thetime or date is to press¨ SEEK or\ FWD (forward).

3. To decrease, press © SEEK ors REV. Turn the f knob, onthe upper right side of theradio, to adjust the selectedsetting.



Changing the Time or Date DefaultSettings

1. With the radio on, press H andthen the softkey under theforward arrow that is currentlydisplayed on the infotainmentdisplay until the time 12H(hour) and 24H (hour), and thedate MM/DD (month and day)and DD/MM (day and month)are displayed.

2. Press the softkey under thedesired option.

3. Press H again to apply theselected default, or let thescreen time out.

Power OutletsPower Outlets 12 Volt DirectCurrent

The accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or an MP3player.

The vehicle may have twoaccessory power outlets on theinstrument panel.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

Certain power accessory plugs maynot be compatible to the accessorypower outlet and could overloadvehicle or adapter fuses. If aproblem is experienced, see yourdealer.

{ Warning

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Caution

Leaving electrical equipmentplugged in for an extended periodof time while the vehicle is off willdrain the battery. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum20 amp rating.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment 0 210.

Caution

Hanging heavy equipment fromthe power outlet can causedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. The poweroutlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.



Power Outlet 110/120 VoltAlternating Current

This power outlet can be used toplug in electrical equipment thatuses a maximum limit of 150 watts.

The 110/120 volt power outlet is onthe instrument panel.

An indicator light on the outlet turnson to show it is in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is on,equipment requiring less than 150watts is plugged into the outlet, andno system fault is detected.

The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition is off, or if theequipment is not fully seated intothe outlet.

If equipment is connected usingmore than 150 watts or a systemfault is detected, a protection circuitshuts off the power supply and theindicator light turns off. To reset thecircuit, unplug the item and plug itback in or turn the RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) off andthen back on. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 175.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following, and may not workproperly if they are plugged in:

. Equipment with high initial peakwattage, such ascompressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools

. Other equipment requiring anextremely stable power supply,such asmicrocomputer-controlledelectric blankets and touchsensor lamps

. Medical equipment

Cigarette LighterIf equipped with a cigarette lighter,to heat push it in all the way and letgo. When it is ready for use, it willpop back out by itself.

Do not use the lighter to plug inaccessory devices. Use the poweroutlets provided.

Caution

Holding a cigarette lighter in whileit is heating does not let thelighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.



AshtraysIf equipped with a removableashtray, it can be placed into thefront floor console cupholder. Openthe cover to use.

Caution

If papers, pins, or otherflammable items are put in theashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage thevehicle. Never put flammableitems in the ashtray.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Some warning lights come on brieflywhen the engine is started toindicate they are working. Whenone of the warning lights comes onand stays on while driving, or whenone of the gauges shows there maybe a problem, check the section thatexplains what to do. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly and evendangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Shown, Metric Similar



If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax diesel supplementfor more information.

SpeedometerThe speedometer shows the vehiclespeed in kilometers per hour (km/h)and miles per hour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer shows how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 109.

Fuel Gauge

Metric

English

The fuel gauge, when the ignition ison, indicates how much fuel is left inthe vehicle fuel tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

The gauge first indicates emptybefore the vehicle is out of fuel, andthe fuel tank should berefueled soon.

Listed are four situations customersmight experience with the fuelgauge. None of these indicate aproblem with the fuel gauge:

. At the gas station, the fuel pumpshuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the fuel gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.


Instruments and Controls 99. The gauge does not go back to

empty when the ignition isturned off.

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

Engine Oil PressureGauge

Metric

English

The oil pressure gauge shows theengine oil pressure in psi (poundsper square inch) or kPa (kilopascals)when the engine is running.

Oil pressure may vary with enginespeed, outside temperature and oilviscosity, but readings above thelow pressure zone indicate thenormal operating range.

A reading in the low pressure zonemay be caused by a dangerouslylow oil level or other problemcausing low oil pressure.

Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine oillow can also damage the engine.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Checkthe oil level as soon as possible.Add oil if required, but if the oillevel is within the operating rangeand the oil pressure is still low,have the vehicle serviced. Alwaysfollow the maintenance schedulefor changing engine oil.



Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric

English

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.

It also provides an indicator of howhard the vehicle is working. During amajority of the operation, the gaugewill read 100 °C (210 °F) or less.If the vehicle is pulling a load orgoing up hills, it is normal for thetemperature to fluctuate andapproach the 122 °C (250 °F) mark.If the gauge reaches the 125 °C(260 °F) mark, it indicates that thecooling system is working beyondits capacity.

See Engine Overheating 0 231.

Voltmeter Gauge

When the engine is not running, butthe ignition is on, this gauge showsthe battery's state of charge inDC volts.

When the engine is running, thegauge shows the condition of thecharging system. Readings betweenthe low and high warning zonesindicate the normal operating range.

Readings in the low warning zonemay occur when a large number ofelectrical accessories are operatingin the vehicle and the engine is leftat an idle for an extended period.



This condition is normal since thecharging system is not able toprovide full power at engine idle. Asengine speeds are increased, thiscondition should correct itself ashigher engine speeds allow thecharging system to create maximumpower.

The vehicle can be only driven for ashort time with the reading in eitherwarning zone. If it must be driven,turn off all unnecessaryaccessories.

Readings in either warning zoneindicate a possible problem in theelectrical system. Have the vehicleserviced as soon as possible.

Seat Belt Reminders

Seat Belt Reminder Light

There is a seat belt reminder lighton the instrument cluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir seat belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver seat belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), thepretensioners (if equipped), theairbag modules, the wiring, and thecrash sensing and diagnostic

module. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag System0 56.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.



If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also display.

Airbag On-Off LightWhen the front outboard passengerairbag is manually turned off usingthe airbag on-off switch on theinstrument panel, if equipped, theindicator light OFF or the off symbolwill come on and stay on as areminder that the airbag has beenturned off. This light will go off whenthe airbag has been turned on. SeeAirbag On-Off Switch 0 63 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

United States

Canada

{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is turned off for aperson who is not in a risk groupidentified by the nationalgovernment, that person will nothave the extra protection of anairbag. In a crash, the airbag willnot be able to inflate and helpprotect the person sitting there.Do not turn off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag unlessthe person sitting there is in a riskgroup identified by the nationalgovernment. See Airbag On-OffSwitch 0 63 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

with the airbag system. Forexample, the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag couldinflate even though the airbagon-off switch is turned off.


If the word ON or the on symbol islit, it means that the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag is enabled,and may inflate. See Airbag On-OffSwitch 0 63 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

Charging System Light

This light comes on briefly when theignition key is turned to START, butthe engine is not running, as acheck to show it is working.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

The light should go out once theengine starts. If it stays on,or comes on while driving, therecould be a problem with thecharging system. A charging systemmessage in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) can also appear. Thislight could indicate that there areproblems with a generator drive belt,or that there is an electricalproblem. Have it checked rightaway. If the vehicle must be driven a

short distance with the light on, turnoff accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check EngineLight)This light is part of the vehicle’semission control on-boarddiagnostic system. If this light is onwhile the engine is running, amalfunction has been detected andthe vehicle may require service. Thelight should come on to show that itis working when the ignition is onand the engine is not running. SeeIgnition Positions 0 172.



Malfunctions are often indicated bythe system before any problem isnoticeable. Being aware of the lightand seeking service promptly whenit comes on may prevent damage.

Caution

If the vehicle is driven continuallywith this light on, the emissioncontrol system may not work aswell, the fuel economy may belower, and the vehicle may notrun smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Modifications to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system, or the use ofreplacement tires that do notmeet the original tirespecifications, can cause this lightto come on. This could lead to

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

costly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoaffect the vehicle’s ability to passan Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 213.

If the light is flashing : Amalfunction has been detected thatcould damage the emission controlsystem and increase vehicleemissions. Diagnosis and servicemay be required.

To help prevent damage, reducevehicle speed and avoid hardaccelerations and uphill grades.If towing a trailer, reduce theamount of cargo being hauled assoon as possible.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to park. Turn the vehicleoff and wait at least 10 secondsbefore restarting the engine. If thelight is still flashing, follow the

previous guidelines and see yourdealer for service as soon aspossible.

If the light is on steady : Amalfunction has been detected.Diagnosis and service may berequired.

Check the following:

. A loose or missing fuel cap maycause the light to come on. SeeFilling the Tank 0 198. A fewdriving trips with the capproperly installed may turn thelight off.

. Poor fuel quality can causeinefficient engine operation andpoor driveability, which may goaway once the engine is warmedup. If this occurs, change thefuel brand. It may require atleast one full tank of the properfuel to turn the light off. See Fuel0 195.

If the light remains on, see yourdealer.



Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

If the vehicle requires an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test, thetest equipment will likely connect tothe vehicle's Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. Connecting devices that arenot used to perform an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test or toservice the vehicle may affectvehicle operation. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment 0 210. Seeyour dealer if assistance is needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:

. The light is on when the engineis running.

. The light does not come onwhen the ignition is on while theengine is off.

. Critical emission control systemshave not been completelydiagnosed. If this happens, thevehicle would not be ready forinspection and might requireseveral days of routine drivingbefore the system is ready forinspection. This can happen ifthe 12-volt battery has recentlybeen replaced or run down, or ifthe vehicle has been recentlyserviced.

See your dealer if the vehicle willnot pass or cannot be made readyfor the test.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

If the warning light comes on, therecould be a brake problem. Have thebrake system inspected right away.

Metric English

This light should come on brieflywhen the engine is started. If it doesnot come on then, have it fixed so itwill be ready to warn you if there isa problem.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light also comes onwhen the parking brake is set. SeeParking Brake 0 185 for moreinformation. The light stays on if theparking brake does not fully release.If it stays on after the parking brakeis fully released, it means thevehicle has a brake problem.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.The pedal might be harder to push,or the pedal might go closer to the



floor. It could take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle 0 287.

{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the light comes on while driving,stop as soon as it is safely possibleand turn off the vehicle. Then startthe engine again to reset thesystem. If the ABS light stays on,or comes on again while driving, thevehicle needs service.

If the ABS light is the only light on,the vehicle has regular brakes, butthe antilock brakes are notfunctioning.

If both the ABS and the brakesystem warning light are on, thevehicle's antilock brakes are notfunctioning and there is a problemwith the regular brakes. See yourdealer for service.

See Brake System Warning Light0 105.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

For vehicles with the Tow/HaulMode feature, this light comes onwhen the Tow/Haul Mode has beenactivated.

See Tow/Haul Mode 0 184.

StabiliTrak OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.



This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If StabiliTrak is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If the StabiliTrak and TCS are off,the system does not assist incontrolling the vehicle. Turn on theTCS and the StabiliTrak systemsand the warning light turns off.


Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled.A Driver Information Center (DIC)message may display. Check theDIC messages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.

If the light is on and flashing, theTCS and/or the StabiliTrak systemis actively working.


Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. Stop as soon as possible,and inflate the tires to the pressurevalue shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See TirePressure 0 261.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 263.



Engine Oil Pressure Light

Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine oillow can also damage the engine.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Checkthe oil level as soon as possible.Add oil if required, but if the oillevel is within the operating rangeand the oil pressure is still low,have the vehicle serviced. Alwaysfollow the maintenance schedulefor changing engine oil.

This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light

English Shown, Metric Similar

This light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition is turnedon as a check to indicate it isworking. If it does not come on,have it fixed.

The low fuel warning light comes onand a chime sounds when thevehicle is low on fuel. The light turnsoff when fuel is added to thefuel tank.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)0 109.

Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operation0 34.



High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger 0 121.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes on when the cruisecontrol is set.

This light goes out when the cruisecontrol is canceled. See CruiseControl 0 189.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)This vehicle has a DIC.

All messages will appear in the DICdisplay at the bottom of theinstrument cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignitionis on. After a short delay, the DICwill display the information that waslast displayed before the enginewas turned off.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, andvehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

If the vehicle has these features, theDIC also displays the compassdirection and the outside airtemperature when viewing the tripand fuel information. The compass

direction appears on the top rightcorner of the DIC display. Theoutside air temperatureautomatically appears in the bottomright corner of the DIC display.If there is a problem with the systemthat controls the temperaturedisplay, the numbers will bereplaced with dashes. If this occurs,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by pressingthe DIC buttons on the instrumentpanel, next to the instrument cluster.



DIC Buttons

The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicleinformation, customization, and set/reset buttons. The button functionsare detailed in the following pages.

3 : Press this button to displaythe odometer, trip odometers, fuelrange, average economy, fuel used,timer, average speed, and digitaltachometer.

T : Press this button to display theoil life, rear park assist, units, tirepressure readings for vehicles withthe Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS), engine hours, TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS)

programming for vehicles with theTPMS and without a RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, andcompass zone and compasscalibration on vehicles with thisfeature.

U : Press this button to customizethe feature settings on the vehicle.See Vehicle Personalization 0 115for more information.

V : Press this button to set or resetcertain functions and to turn off oracknowledge messages on the DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 : Press this button to scrollthrough the following menu items:

Odometer

Press3 until XX km (mi)displays. This display shows thedistance the vehicle has beendriven in either kilometers (km) ormiles (mi).

Trip Odometers

Press3 until A or B displays.This display shows the currentdistance traveled in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi) sincethe last reset for each trip odometer.Both trip odometers can be used atthe same time.

Each trip odometer can be reset tozero separately by pressing V whilethe desired trip odometer isdisplayed.

The trip odometer has a featurecalled the retro-active reset. Thiscan be used to set the trip odometerto the number of kilometers (miles)driven since the ignition was lastturned on. This can be used if thetrip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature,press and hold V for at leastfour seconds. The trip odometer willdisplay the number ofkilometers (km) or miles (mi) drivensince the ignition was last turned onand the vehicle was moving. Once



the vehicle begins moving, the tripodometer will accumulate mileage.For example, if the vehicle wasdriven 8 km (5 miles) before it isstarted again, and then theretro-active reset feature isactivated, the display will show 8 km(5 miles). As the vehicle beginsmoving, the display will thenincrease to 8.1 km (5.1 miles),8.2 km (5.2 miles), etc.

If the retro-active reset feature isactivated after the vehicle is started,but before it begins moving, thedisplay will show the number ofkilometers (km) or miles (mi) thatwere driven during the last ignitioncycle.

Fuel Range

Press3 until FUEL RANGEdisplays. This display shows theapproximate number of remainingkilometers (km) or miles (mi) thevehicle can be driven withoutrefueling. The display will showLOW if the fuel level is low.

The fuel range estimate is based onan average of the fuel economyover recent driving history and theamount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. This estimate will change ifdriving conditions change. Forexample, if driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, this displaymay read one number, but if thevehicle is driven on a freeway, thenumber may change even thoughthe same amount of fuel is in thefuel tank. This is because differentdriving conditions produce differentfuel economies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fueleconomy than city driving.

If the vehicle is low on fuel, theFUEL LEVEL LOW message will bedisplayed.

Average Economy

Press3 until AVG ECONOMYdisplays. This display shows theapproximate average liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This number iscalculated based on the number ofL/100 km (mpg) recorded since the

last time this menu item was reset.To reset AVG ECONOMY, press andhold V. The display will returnto zero.

Fuel Used

Press3 until FUEL USEDdisplays. This display shows thenumber of liters (L) or gallons (gal)of fuel used since the last reset ofthis menu item. To reset the fuelused information, press and hold Vwhile FUEL USED is displayed.

Timer

Press3 until TIMER displays.This display can be used as a timer.

To start the timer, press V whileTIMER is displayed. The display willshow the amount of time that haspassed since the timer was lastreset, not including time the ignitionis off. Time will continue to becounted as long as the ignition ison, even if another display is beingshown on the DIC. The timer will



record up to 99 hours, 59 minutesand 59 seconds (99:59:59) afterwhich the display will return to zero.

To stop the timer, press V brieflywhile TIMER is displayed.

To reset the timer to zero, press andhold V while TIMER is displayed.

Average Speed

Press3 until AVERAGE SPEEDdisplays. This display shows theaverage speed of the vehicle inkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value. To reset thevalue, press and hold V. Thedisplay will return to zero.

Digital Tachometer

Press3 untilTachometer ##00 RPM displays.This display shows the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (RPM).

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

T : Press this button to scrollthrough the following menu items:

Oil Life

PressT until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays. This displayshows an estimate of the oil'sremaining useful life. If you see99%OIL LIFE REMAINING on thedisplay, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains. The engineoil life system will alert you tochange the oil on a scheduleconsistent with your drivingconditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.You should change the oil as soonas possible. See Engine Oil 0 218.In addition to the engine oil lifesystem monitoring the oil life,

additional maintenance isrecommended. See MaintenanceSchedule 0 301.

Remember, you must reset the OILLIFE yourself after each oil change.It will not reset itself. Also, becareful not to reset the OIL LIFEaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, see EngineOil Life System 0 220.

Side Blind Zone Alert

If the vehicle has Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA), this display allows thesystem to be turned on or off. PressT until SBZA displays. Once inthis display, press V to selectbetween ON or OFF. When theSBZA system is turned off, a DICmessage will display. See SideBlind Zone Alert (SBZA) 0 193.

Park Assist

If the vehicle has the Rear ParkingAssist (RPA) system, pressT untilPARK ASSIST displays. This



display allows the system to beturned on or off. Once in thisdisplay, press to select between ONor OFF. The RPA systemautomatically turns back on aftereach vehicle start. When the RPAsystem is turned off and the vehicleis shifted out of P (Park), the DICwill display the PARK ASSIST OFFmessage as a reminder that thesystem has been turned off. SeeParking Assist 0 192.

Units

PressT until UNITS displays. Thisdisplay allows you to select betweenmetric or English units ofmeasurement. Once in this display,press V to select between METRICor ENGLISH units.

Tire Pressure

If the vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thepressure for each tire can be viewedin the DIC. The tire pressure will be

shown in either kilopascals (kPa) orpounds per square inch (psi).PressT until the DIC displaysFRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ##RIGHT ##. PressT again until theDIC displays REAR TIRESPSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

If a low tire pressure condition isdetected by the system whiledriving, a message advising you tocheck the pressure in a specific tirewill appear in the display. See TirePressure 0 261.

If the tire pressure display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with the vehicle.If this consistently occurs, see yourdealer for service.

Engine Hours

PressT until ENGINE HOURSdisplays. This display shows thetotal number of hours the enginehas run.

Relearn Tire Positions

The vehicle may have this display.To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). If the vehiclehas the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS), after rotating thetires or after replacing a tire orsensor, the system must re-learn thetire positions. To re-learn the tirepositions, see Tire Pressure MonitorSystem 0 262. See Tire Inspection0 266 and Tire Rotation 0 266.

Change Compass Zone

The vehicle may have this feature.To change the compass zonethrough the DIC, see Compass0 92.

Calibrate Compass

The vehicle may have this feature.The compass can be manuallycalibrated. To calibrate the compassthrough the DIC, see Compass0 92.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.



Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action that may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may appear one afteranother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing V. The messages thatrequire immediate action cannot becleared until that action isperformed.

All messages should be takenseriously; clearing the messagedoes not correct the problem.

If a SERVICE message appears,see your dealer.

Follow the instructions given in themessages. The system displaysmessages regarding the followingtopics:

. Service Messages

. Fluid Levels

. Vehicle Security

. Brakes

. Ride Control Systems

. Driver Assistance Systems

. Cruise Control

. Lighting and Bulb Replacement

. Wiper/Washer Systems

. Doors and Windows

. Seat Belts

. Airbag Systems

. Engine and Transmission

. Tire Pressure

. Battery

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's propulsion power isreduced. Reduced propulsion powercan affect the vehicle's ability toaccelerate. If this message is on,

but there is no observed reductionin performance, proceed to yourdestination. The performance maybe reduced the next time the vehicleis driven. The vehicle may be drivenwhile this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, or displaysrepeatedly, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer for service assoon as possible.

Vehicle Speed Messages

SPEED LIMITED TOXXX KM/H (MPH)

This message shows that thevehicle speed has been limited tothe speed displayed. The limitedspeed is a protection for variouspropulsion and vehicle systems,such as lubrication, thermal,suspension, Teen Driver ifequipped, or tires.



VehiclePersonalizationThis vehicle may havecustomization capabilities that allowyou to program certain features toone preferred setting. Customizationfeatures can only be programmed toone setting on the vehicle andcannot be programmed to apreferred setting for two differentdrivers.

All of the customization options maynot be available on your vehicle.Only the options available will bedisplayed on the DIC.

The default settings for thecustomization features were setwhen the vehicle left the factory, butmay have been changed from theirdefault state since then.

The customization preferences areautomatically recalled.

To change customizationpreferences, use the followingprocedure.

Entering the FeatureSettings Menu

1. Turn the ignition on and placethe vehicle in P (Park).

To avoid excessive drain onthe battery, it is recommendedthat the headlamps areturned off.

2. Press U to enter the featuresettings menu.

If the menu is not available,FEATURE SETTINGSAVAILABLE IN PARK willdisplay. Before entering themenu, make sure the vehicle isin P (Park).

Feature Settings Menu Items

The following are customizationfeatures that allow you to programsettings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH

This feature will only display if alanguage other than English hasbeen set. This feature allows you tochange the language in which theDIC messages appear to English.

Press U until the PRESS V TODISPLAY IN ENGLISH screenappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to displayall DIC messages in English.

LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to select thelanguage in which the DICmessages will appear.

Press U until the LANGUAGEscreen appears on the DIC display.Press V once to access the settings

for this feature. Then press U toscroll through the following settings:

ENGLISH (default) : All messageswill appear in English.

FRANCAIS : All messages willappear in French.

ESPANOL : All messages willappear in Spanish.

ARABIC : All messages will appearin Arabic.

NO CHANGE : No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.



To select a setting, press V whilethe desired setting is displayed onthe DIC. A beep will sound once alanguage has been selected.

AUTO DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhen the doors willautomatically lock.

Press U until AUTO DOOR LOCKappears on the DIC display.Press V once to access the settings


SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default) :The doors will automatically lockwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

AT VEHICLE SPEED : The doorswill automatically lock when thevehicle speed is above 13 km/h(8 mph) for three seconds.


To select a setting, press V whilethe desired setting is displayed onthe DIC.

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to turn off theautomatic door unlocking feature.It also allows you to select whichdoors and when the doors willautomatically unlock.

Press U until AUTO DOORUNLOCK appears on the DICdisplay. Press V once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressU to scroll through the followingsettings:

OFF : None of the doors willautomatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT : Only thedriver door will unlock when the keyis taken out of the ignition.

DRIVER IN PARK : Only the driverdoor will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).

ALL AT KEY OUT : All of the doorswill unlock when the key is takenout of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default) : All of thedoors will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).



REMOTE DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen locking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when locking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 26.



Press U until REMOTE DOORLOCK appears on the DIC display.Press V once to access the settings


OFF : There will be no feedbackwhen you press Q on the RKEtransmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY : The exterior lampswill flash when you press Q on theRKE transmitter.

HORN ONLY : The horn will soundon the second press of Q on theRKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default) : Theexterior lamps will flash when youpress Q on the RKE transmitter, and

the horn will sound when Q ispressed again within five seconds ofthe previous command.



REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen unlocking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when unlocking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter ifthe doors are open. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 26.

Press U until REMOTE DOORUNLOCK appears on the DICdisplay. Press V once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressU to scroll through the followingsettings:

LIGHTS OFF : The exterior lampswill not flash when you press K onthe RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default) : The exteriorlamps will flash when you press Kon the RKE transmitter.



DELAY DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not the locking of thedoors will be delayed. When lockingthe doors with the power door lockswitch and a door is open, thisfeature will delay locking the doorsuntil five seconds after the last dooris closed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use. The key must beout of the ignition for this feature towork. You can temporarily overridedelayed locking by pressing thepower door lock switch twice or Qon the RKE transmitter twice. SeeDelayed Locking 0 30.



Press U until DELAY DOOR LOCKappears on the DIC display.Press V once to access the settings


OFF : There will be no delayedlocking of the vehicle's doors.

ON (default) : The doors will notlock until five seconds after the lastdoor is closed.



EXIT LIGHTING

This feature allows you to select theamount of time you want theexterior lamps to remain on when itis dark enough outside. Thishappens after the key is turned fromon to off.

Press U until EXIT LIGHTINGappears on the DIC display.Press V once to access the settings


OFF : The exterior lamps will notturn on.

10 SECONDS (default) : Theexterior lamps will stay on for10 seconds.

1MINUTE : The exterior lamps willstay on for one minute.

2MINUTES : The exterior lamps willstay on for twominutes.



APPROACH LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to have the exteriorlamps turn on briefly during low light

periods after unlocking the vehicleusing the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

Press U until APPROACHLIGHTING appears on the DICdisplay. Press V once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressU to scroll through the followingsettings:

OFF : The exterior lamps will notturn on when you unlock the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

ON (default) : If it is dark enoughoutside, the exterior lamps will turnon briefly when you unlock thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.The lamps will remain on for20 seconds or until Q on the RKEtransmitter is pressed, or the vehicleis no longer off. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 26.





CHIME VOLUME

This feature allows you to select thevolume level of the chime.

Press U until CHIME VOLUMEappears on the DIC display.Press V once to access the settings


NORMAL : The chime volume willbe set to a normal level.

LOUD : The chime volume will beset to a loud level.


There is no default for chimevolume. The volume will stay at thelast known setting.


FACTORY SETTINGS

This feature allows you to set all ofthe customization features back totheir factory default settings.

Press U until FACTORY SETTINGSappears on the DIC display.Press V once to access the settings


RESTORE ALL (default) : Thecustomization features will be set totheir factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE : Thecustomization features will not beset to their factory default settings.


EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS

This feature allows you to exit thefeature settings menu.

Press U until FEATURE SETTINGS

PRESS V TO EXIT appears in the

DIC display. Press V once to exitthe menu.

If you do not exit, pressing U willreturn you to the beginning of thefeature settings menu.

Exiting the FeatureSettings Menu

The feature settings menu will beexited when any of the followingoccurs:

. The vehicle is no longer on.

. The3 orT DIC buttons arepressed.

. The end of the feature settingsmenu is reached and exited.

. A 40–second time period haselapsed with no selection made.


120 Lighting

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . 120Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 123Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Lighting FeaturesEntry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Battery Load Management . . . 125Battery Power Protection . . . . . 125Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

There are four positions:

O : Briefly turn the control to thisposition to turn the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) off or back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position only works forvehicles that are shifted into theP (Park) position.

AUTO : Automatically turns theexterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

2 : Turns on the headlampstogether with the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

If the headlamps are turned onwhile the vehicle is on, theheadlamps turn off automatically10 minutes after the ignition isturned off. If the headlamps areturned on while the vehicle is off,the headlamps will continue to stayon. To prevent the battery frombeing drained, turn the control to theO position.

A warning chime sounds if the driverdoor is opened while the ignitionswitch is off and the headlampsare on.

To change the headlamps from lowbeam to high beam, pull the turnsignal lever all the way toward you.Then release it.


Lighting 121

Exterior Lamps OffReminderIf a door is open, a reminder chimesounds when the headlamps orparking lamps are manually turnedon and the key is out of the ignition.To turn off the chime, turn theheadlamp switch to O or AUTO andthen back on, or close and re-openthe door. In the auto mode, theheadlamps turn off once the ignitionis off or may remain on until theheadlamp delay ends, if enabled inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See “Exit Lighting” under VehiclePersonalization 0 115.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 : Pull the turn signal lever allthe way toward you to change theheadlamps from low to high beam.Then release it.

Pull the turn signal lever all the waytoward you again and release it tochange the headlamps back tolow beam.

This instrument cluster light comeson when the high-beam headlampsare on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature is used to signal to thevehicle ahead that you wantto pass.

If the headlamps are off or in thelow‐beam position, pull the turnsignal lever toward you tomomentarily switch to high beams.

Release the lever to turn thehigh-beam headlamps off.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)DRL can make it easier for others tosee the front of the vehicle duringthe day. Fully functional DRL arerequired on all vehicles first sold inCanada.

The DRL system comes on indaylight when the followingconditions are met:

. The ignition is on.

. The exterior lamp control is inthe AUTO position.

. The shift lever is not in P (Park).

. The light sensor determines it isdaytime.

When the DRL are on, the taillamps,sidemarker, instrument panel lights,and other lamps will not be on.

The automatic headlamp systemautomatically switches from DRL tothe headlamps depending on thedarkness of the surroundings.


122 Lighting

To turn off the DRL, turn the exteriorlamp control to O and then releaseit. For vehicles first sold in Canada,the DRL can only be turned offwhen the vehicle is parked.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside andthe headlamp switch is in AUTO,the automatic headlamp systemturns on the headlamps, along withthe taillamps, sidemarker lamps,parking lamps, and the instrumentpanel lights. The radio lights willalso be dim.

To turn off the automatic headlampsystem, turn the exterior lampcontrol to the off position and thenrelease. For vehicles first sold inCanada, the transmission must bein the P (Park) position, before theautomatic headlamp system can beturned off.

The vehicle has a light sensor onthe top of the instrument panel. Donot cover the sensor; otherwise thesystem will come on whenever theignition is on.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

There is a delay in the transitionbetween the daytime and nighttimeoperation of the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) and the automaticheadlamp system so that drivingunder bridges or bright overheadstreet lights does not affect thesystem. The DRL and automaticheadlamp system are only affectedwhen the light sensor sees achange in lighting lasting longerthan the delay.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem comes on immediately.Once the vehicle leaves the garage,it takes approximately 30 secondsfor the automatic headlamp systemto change to DRL if it is lightoutside. During that delay, theinstrument cluster may not be asbright as usual. Make sure theinstrument panel brightness controlis in the full bright position. SeeInstrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 124.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon, and the exterior lamp control isin AUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lampscome on. The transition time for thelamps coming on varies based onwiper speed. When the wipers arenot operating, these lamps turn off.Move the exterior lamp control toPor; to disable this feature.


Lighting 123

Hazard Warning Flashers

| : Press this button to make thefront and rear turn signal lampsflash on and off. This warns othersthat you are having trouble. Pressagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashersare on, the vehicle's turn signals willnot work.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

G : An arrow on the instrumentcluster flashes in the direction of theturn or lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever allthe way up or down.

To signal a lane change, raise orlower the lever until the arrow startsto flash. The turn signalautomatically flashes three timesand if the Tow/Haul Mode is active itflashes six times. Holding the turnsignal lever for more thanone second causes the turn signalsto flash continually until the lever isreleased.

The lever returns to its startingposition when released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out.

Have any burned out bulbsreplaced. If a bulb is not burned out,check the fuse. See Fuses andCircuit Breakers 0 246.

Turn Signal On Chime

If the turn signal is left on for morethan 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chimesounds at each flash of the turnsignal and the message TURNSIGNAL ON also appears in theDriver Information Center (DIC). Toturn off the chime and message,move the turn signal lever to the offposition.


124 Lighting

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination ControlThe knob for this feature is to theleft of the steering column.

D : Push the knob to extend andthen turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to brighten or dimthe instrument panel lights and theradio display. This only works if theheadlamps or parking lamps are on.

Dome LampsThe dome lamps come on when anydoor is opened. They turn off afterall the doors are closed.

The instrument panel brightnessknob extends whenD is pressed.To manually turn on the domelamps, pressD then turn the knobclockwise to the farthest position. Inthis position, the dome lampsremain on whether a door is openedor closed.

Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamp override sets thedome lamps to remain off or comeon automatically when a door isopened.

E DOME OFF : Press this buttonin and the dome lamps remain offwhen a door is opened. Press thebutton again to return it to theextended position so that the domelamps come on when a door isopened.

Reading LampsIf equipped with reading lamps,press the button next to each lampto turn it on or off.

The vehicle may also have readinglamps in other locations. The lampscannot be adjusted.


Lighting 125

Lighting Features

Entry/Exit LightingThe vehicle has an illuminatedentry/exit feature.

The dome lamps come on iftheE DOME OFF button is in theextended position, when a door isopened, or the key is removed fromthe ignition.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle may have ElectricPower Management (EPM) thatestimates the battery's temperatureand state of charge. It then adjuststhe voltage for best performanceand extended life of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver Information

Center (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as SERVICEBATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM.If this messages displays, it isrecommended that the driver reducethe electrical loads as much aspossible.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature shuts off the domelamps if they are left on for morethan 10 minutes when the ignition isoff. This helps to prevent the batteryfrom running down.

Exterior Lighting BatterySaverThe exterior lamps turn off about10 minutes after the ignition isturned off, if the parking lamps orheadlamps have been manually lefton. This protects against draining


126 Lighting

the battery. To restart the 10-minutetimer, turn the exterior lamp controlto the O position and then back to

the; or2 position.

To keep the lamps on for more than10 minutes, the ignition must be onor in ACC/ACCESSORY.


Infotainment System 127

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . 128Overview (AM-FM Radio) . . . . . 128Overview (Radio withCD/MP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 136Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 136

Audio PlayersAvoiding Untrusted MediaDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

OnStar SystemOnStar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Introduction

InfotainmentBase radio information is included inthis manual. See the infotainmentmanual for information on otheravailable infotainment systems.

Read the following pages tobecome familiar with the features.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road fortoo long or too often while usingany infotainment feature cancause a crash. You or otherscould be injured or killed. Do notgive extended attention toinfotainment tasks while driving.Limit your glances at the vehicledisplays and focus your attentionon driving. Use voice commandswhenever possible.

The infotainment system has built-infeatures intended to help avoiddistraction by disabling some

functions when driving. Thesefunctions may gray out when theyare unavailable. Many infotainmentfeatures are also available throughthe instrument cluster and steeringwheel controls.

Before driving:

. Become familiar with theoperation, center stack controls,and infotainment displaycontrols.

. Set up the audio by presettingfavorite stations, setting thetone, and adjusting thespeakers.

. Set up phone numbers inadvance so they can be calledeasily by pressing a singlecontrol or by using a single voicecommand if equipped withBluetooth phone capability.

See Defensive Driving 0 161.

To play the infotainment system withthe ignition off, see RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 175.


128 Infotainment System

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe theft-deterrent feature works bylearning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) to theinfotainment system. Theinfotainment system does notoperate if it is stolen or moved to adifferent vehicle.

Overview (AM-FM Radio)

Overview (AM-FM Radio)

1. 4. Press to show information

on the current station ortrack.

2. FAV

. Press to scroll through thefavorite pages.

3. MENU

. Press to set the number offavorite pages.

. Press to select the SpeedCompensation Volumesetting.


Infotainment System 129. Press to turn Auto Page

Text Information on or off.

4. Buttons 1 - 6

. Press to save and selectfavorite stations.

5. EQ

. Press to adjust theequalizer.

6. f. Press to set the bass,

midrange, treble, fade, andbalance.

. Turn to manually selectradio stations.

7. CAT

. Press to display a list ofSXM categories,if equipped.

8. Auxiliary Input Jack (IfEquipped)

. Use to connect externalaudio devices.

9. SRCE

. Press to scroll throughauxiliary devices, AM, FM,or SXM if equipped.

10. \ FWD

. Press and hold to fastforward through a track.

11. s REV

. Press and hold to gobackward fast through atrack.

12. P. Press to turn the

infotainment system onor off.

. Turn to adjust the volume.

13. ¨ SEEK

. Seeks or scans to the nextstation.

14. © SEEK

. Seeks or scans to theprevious station.

15. H. Press to set the clock

and date.



Overview (Radio with CD/MP3)

Overview (Radio with CD/MP3)

1. 4. Press to show information

on the current station ortrack.

2. FAV

. Press to scroll through thefavorite pages.

3. MENU

. Press to set the number offavorite pages.

. Press to select the SpeedCompensation Volumesetting.

. Press to turn Auto PageText Information on or off.

4. Buttons 1 - 6

. Saves and selects favoritestations.

5. EQ

. Press to adjust theequalizer.

6. f. Press to set the bass,

midrange, treble, fade, andbalance.

. Turn to manually selectradio stations.

7. CAT

. Press to display a list ofSXM categories,if equipped.

8. Z EJECT

. Press to eject theloaded CD.



9. Auxiliary Input Jack (IfEquipped)

. Use to connect externalaudio devices.

10. CD/AUX

. Press to scroll throughselecting the CD or anauxiliary device.

11. \ FWD

. Press and hold to fastforward through a track.

12. s REV

. Press and hold to gobackward fast through atrack.

13. P. Press to turn the

infotainment system onor off.

. Turn to adjust the volume.

14. ¨ SEEK

. Seeks or scans to the nextstation.

15. © SEEK

. Seeks or scans to theprevious station.

16. BAND

. Press to scroll through theavailable bands FM1, FM2,AM, or SXM if equipped.

17. H. Press to set the clock

and date.

Operation

Using the Radio

O : Press to turn the system onand off.

Turn clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease the volume.

4 : Press to switch the displaybetween the radio station frequencyand the time. While the ignition isoff, press this button to display thetime. Press to display additional textinformation related to the currentFM-RDS station or MP3 song.A choice of additional information

such as Channel, Song, Artist, andCAT (category) can display.Continue pressing to highlight thedesired tab, or press the softkeyunder any one of the tabs and theinformation about that tab displays.

Speed Compensated Volume(SCV) : Radios with SCVautomatically adjusts the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle speedchanges while driving, so that thevolume level stays consistent.

To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to thedesired level.

2. Press the MENU button todisplay the radio setup menu.

3. Press the softkey under theAUTO VOLUM (automaticvolume) tab on the infotainmentdisplay.

4. Press the softkey under thedesired Speed CompensatedVolume setting (OFF, Low,Med, or High) to select thelevel of radio volume



compensation. The displaytimes out after approximately10 seconds. Each highersetting allows for more radiovolume compensation at fastervehicle speeds.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

To adjust the bass or treble:

1. Press the f knob until Bass orTreble displays.

2. To adjust the setting, do one ofthe following:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press ¨ SEEK, or © SEEK.

EQ : Press this button to choosebass and treble equalizationsettings designed for different typesof music. Selecting MANUAL,or changing bass or treble, returnsthe EQ to the manual bass andtreble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be savedfor each source.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE : To adjust the balanceor fade:

1. Press the f knob until thespeaker control tabs display.

2. Highlight the desired speakercontrol tab by doing one of thefollowing:

. Press the f knob.

. Press the softkey under thedesired tab.

3. Adjust the setting by doing oneof the following:

. Turn the f knob clockwiseor counterclockwise.

. Press ¨ SEEK or © SEEK.

. Press\ FWD ors REV.

To quickly adjust all speaker andtone controls to the middle position,press the f knob for more thantwo seconds.

If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) isturned on, the radio disables FADEand mutes the rear speakers.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error : The audiosystem has been calibrated for thevehicle from the factory.If Calibration Error displays, itmeans that the radio has not beenconfigured properly for the vehicleand it must be returned to yourdealer for service.

VIN or NO VIN : One of thesemessages will display when theTheftLock system has locked up theradio. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer.



Radio

AM-FM Radio

Radio Data System (RDS)

The radio may have an RDS. TheRDS feature is available for useonly on FM stations that broadcastRDS information. This system reliesupon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and only workswhen the information is available.While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station nameor call letters display. In rare cases,a radio station could broadcastincorrect information that causes theradio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radiostation.

Finding a Station

BAND or SRCE : Press to switchbetween FM1, FM2, AM, and SXM.The selection displays.

f : Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the station frequency.

© SEEK or ¨ SEEK : Press© SEEK to go to the previousor ¨ SEEK to go to the next stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and holdeither button for two seconds until abeep sounds. The radio goes to astation, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. ForAM-FM Radio and Radio with CD,the station frequency flashes whilethe radio is in the scan mode. Presseither button again to stop scanning.

The radio seeks and scans stationsonly with a strong signal that are inthe selected band.

Scan presets within the currentselected band by pressing andholding either SEEK button forfour seconds until a double beepsounds. The radio goes to a storedpreset, plays for a few seconds if astrong signal is present, then goesto the next stored preset. Thestation frequency flashes while theradio is in the scan mode.

Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

You are encouraged to set up radiostation favorites while the vehicle isparked. Tune to favorite stationsusing the presets, favorites button,and steering wheel controls,if equipped. See Defensive Driving0 161.

FAV : If equipped with a FAV button,a maximum of 36 stations can beprogrammed as favorites by usingthe six softkeys below the radiostation frequency tabs and by usingthe radio favorites page button (FAVbutton). Press FAV to go through upto six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations availableper page. Each page of favoritescan contain any combination of AMand FM stations.

The balance/fade and tone settingsthat were previously adjusted, arestored with the favorite stations.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radiostation.



2. Press FAV to display the pagewhere the station is to bestored.

3. Press and hold one of thesix softkeys until a beepsounds. When that softkey ispressed and released, thestation that was set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for eachsoftkey radio station to bestored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages canbe set up using the MENU button.To set up the number of favoritespages:

1. Press MENU to display theradio setup menu.

2. Press the softkey below theFAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressing thesoftkey below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press FAV, or let the menu timeout, to return to the originalmain radio screen showing theradio station frequency tabs

and to begin the process ofprogramming favorites for thechosen number of numberedpages.

Satellite RadioSiriusXM, if equipped, is a satelliteradio service based in the UnitedStates and Canada only.

Finding a Category (CAT)Station

CAT : The CAT button is used tofind SXM channels (if equipped)while the radio is in the SXM mode.

Finding a Channel

BAND or SRCE : Press to switchbetween FM1, FM2, AM, and SXM ifequipped. The selection displays.

f : Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the station frequency.

© SEEK or ¨ SEEK : Press© SEEK to go to the previousor ¨ SEEK to go to the next stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and holdeither button for two seconds until abeep sounds. The radio goes to astation, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Thestation frequency flashes while theradio is in the scan mode. Presseither button again to stop scanning.

The radio seeks and scans stationsonly with a strong signal that are inthe selected band.

To scan presets within the currentselected band, press and hold eitherSEEK button for four seconds until adouble beep sounds. The radiogoes to a stored preset, plays for afew seconds if a strong signal ispresent, then goes to the nextstored preset. The station frequencyflashes while the radio is in thescan mode.

Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

You are encouraged to set up radiostation favorites while the vehicle isparked. Tune to favorite stationsusing the presets, favorites button,



and steering wheel controls,if equipped. See Defensive Driving0 161.

FAV : If equipped with a FAV button,a maximum of 36 stations can beprogrammed as favorites using thesix softkeys below the radio stationfrequency tabs and by using theradio favorites page button (FAVbutton). Press FAV to go through upto six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations availableper page. Each page of favoritescan contain any combination of AM,FM, or SXM stations.

The balance/fade and tone settingsthat were previously adjusted arestored with the favorite stations.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radiostation.

2. Press FAV to display the pagewhere the station is to bestored.

3. Press and hold one of thesix softkeys until a beepsounds. When that softkey ispressed and released, thestation that was set returns.

4. Repeat the steps for eachsoftkey radio station to bestored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages canbe set up using the MENU button.To set up the number of favoritespages:

1. Press MENU to display theradio setup menu.

2. Press the softkey below theFAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressing thesoftkey below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press FAV, or let the menu timeout, to return to the originalmain radio screen showing theradio station frequency tabsand to begin the process of

programming favorites for thechosen number of numberedpages.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms and



power lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

FM Stereo

FM stereo gives the best sound, butFM signals reach only about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Tall buildings orhills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade inand out.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the radio. Thisinterference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference causes an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna will gothrough most car washes as long asit is securely attached. If the

antenna becomes slightly bent,straighten it out by hand. If it isbadly bent, replace it.

Occasionally check that the antennais tight at the base. If tightening isrequired, protect the paint fromdamage.

Multi-Band AntennaThe multi-band antenna is on theroof of the vehicle. The antenna isused for the Navigation System,OnStar and the SiriusXM SatelliteRadio Service System if the vehiclehas these features. Tall buildings,hills, trees, heavy foliage, tunnels,bridges, and garages will affectreception. Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear reception.Make sure there is sufficientclearance when entering garages orparking structures.

Audio Players

Avoiding Untrusted MediaDevicesWhen using media devices such asCDs, DVDs, Blu-ray Discs, SDcards, USB devices, and mobiledevices, consider the source.Untrusted media devices couldcontain files that affect systemoperation or performance. Avoid useif the content or origin cannot betrusted.

CD Player

Care of the CD Player

Do not add any label to a CD.It could get caught in the CD player.If a CD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of therecorded CD with a marking pen.

The use of CD lens cleaners is notadvised, due to the risk ofcontaminating the lens of the CDoptics with lubricants internal to theCD player mechanism.



Caution

If a label is added to a CD, morethan one CD is inserted into theslot at a time, or an attempt ismade to play scratched ordamaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD PlayerMessages” later in this section.

Care of CDs

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R orCD-RW quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the musicthat has been recorded, and theway the CD-R or CD-RW has beenhandled. Handle them carefully.Store CD-Rs or CD-RWs in theiroriginal cases or other protective

cases and away from direct sunlightand dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If thesurface of a CD is damaged, suchas cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD does not play properly or notat all. Do not touch the bottom sideof a CD while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up CDsby the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled,clean it with a soft, lint-free cloth ordampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,neutral detergent solution mixedwith water. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Inserting a CD

Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the CD should begin playing.

Ejecting a CD

Z EJECT : Press and release toeject the disc. Remove the CDwhen Remove Disc displays. If the

disc is not removed, after severalseconds the disc is automaticallypulled back into the player.

Playing a CD

If the ignition or radio is turned offwith a CD in the player, it stays inthe player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CDsymbol displays on the left side ofthe radio display. As each new trackstarts to play, the track numberdisplays.

The CD player can play the smaller8 cm (3 in) single CDs with anadapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

CD/AUX : Press to cycle betweenCD or Auxiliary when listening to theradio. The CD icon and a messageshowing the disc and/or tracknumber will display when a CD is inthe player. Press again and thesystem automatically searches for



an auxiliary input device; seeAuxiliary Devices 0 141. If aportable audio player is notconnected, “No Input Device Found”displays.

4 : Press to display additional textinformation related to the currentsong. If information is available, thesong title information displays onthe top line of the display and artistinformation displays on the bottomline. When information is notavailable, NO INFO displays.

f : Turn to select tracks on the CDthat is currently playing.

© SEEK : Press to go to the start ofthe current track if more than10 seconds on the CD have played.

Press to go to the previous track ifless than 10 seconds on the CDhave played.

Press and hold, or press multipletimes, to continue moving backwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

¨ SEEK : Press to go to the nexttrack.

Press and hold, or press multipletimes, to continue moving forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV : Press and hold to reverseplayback quickly within a track.

\ FWD : Press and hold toadvance playback quickly within atrack.

RDM : Press to listen to tracks inrandom, rather than sequentialorder. To use random, do one of thefollowing:

For the AM-FM Radio with CD/MP3:

1. Press the RDM button until therandom icon displays.

2. Press the RDM button againuntil the random icondisappears from the display.

For the Radio with CD/MP3:

1. Press the softkey positionedunder the RDM tab untilRandom Current Disc displays.

2. Press the softkey again to turnoff random play.

MP3-Supported Files

The Radio with CD/MP3 have thecapability of playing an MP3 CD-Ror CD-RW disc.

Format

Radios that have the capability ofplaying MP3s can play .mp3 or .wmafiles that were recorded onto aCD-R or CD-RW disc. The files canbe recorded with the following fixedbit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps ora variable bit rate.

Compressed Audio or Mixed ModeDiscs

The radio can play discs thatcontain both uncompressed CDaudio and MP3 files. If both formatsare on the disc, the radio reads allMP3 files first, then theuncompressed CD audio files.



CD-R- or CD-RW-Supported Fileand Folder Structure

The radio supports:

. Up to 50 folders.

. Up to eight folders in depth.

. Up to 50 playlists.

. Up to 255 files.

. Playlists with an .m3u or .wplextension.

. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cdafile extension.

Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. Files are stored in the rootdirectory when the disc or storagedevice does not contain folders.Files accessed from the rootdirectory of a CD display asF1 ROOT.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.

Order of Play

Compressed audio files areaccessed in the following order:

. Playlists (Px).

. Files stored in the root directory.

. Files stored in folders in the rootdirectory.

Tracks are played in the followingorder:

. Play begins from the first track inthe first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

. Play begins from the first track inthe first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played,play continues from the firsttrack of the first folder.

File System and Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name contained in the ID3 tag.If the song name is not present inthe ID3 tag, then the radio displaysthe file name without the extension(such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32characters or four pages areshortened. The display does notshow parts of words on the lastpage of text, and the extension ofthe file name is not displayed.

Preprogrammed Playlists

CDs that have preprogrammedplaylists created using WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed; however,there is no playlist-editing capabilityusing the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playlists that have an .m3u or .plsfile extension and are stored on aUSB device may be supported bythe radio with a USB port.



Playlists can be changed by usingthe softkeys below the Sc andc T tabs, the f knob, the © SEEKbutton, or the ¨ SEEK button. AnMP3 CD-R or CD-RW that has beenrecorded without using file folderscan be played. If a CD-R or CD-RWcontains more than the maximum of50 folders, 15 playlists, and512 folders and files, the playerallows access and navigates up tothe maximum, but all items over themaximum are not accessible.

Playing an MP3

4 : Press to display additional textinformation related to the currentsong. If information is available, thesong title information displays onthe top line of the display and artistinformation displays on the bottomline. When information is notavailable, NO INFO displays.

f : Turn to select MP3s on the CDcurrently playing.

© SEEK : Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than 10 secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continuemoving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK : Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.

s REV : Press and hold to reverseplayback quickly. Sound is heardat a reduced volume and theelapsed time of the file displays.Releases REV to resume playing.

\ FWD : Press and hold toadvance playback quickly. Sound isheard at a reduced volume and theelapsed time of the file displays.Release\ FWD to resumeplaying. The elapsed time of the filedisplays.

Sc : Press the softkey below theSc tab to go to the first track inthe previous folder.

c T : Press the softkey belowthec T tab to go to the first trackin the next folder.

RDM : Press to listen to tracks inrandom, rather than sequentialorder. To use random, do one of thefollowing:

For the Radio with CD/MP3:

1. Press the softkey under theRDM tab until Random CurrentDisc displays.

2. Press the softkey again to turnoff random play.

h : Press the softkey below theh tab to play the files in order byartist or album.

The player scans the disc to sort thefiles by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It can take severalminutes to scan the disc dependingon the number of files on the disc.The radio may begin playing while itis scanning in the background.

When the scan is finished, the discbegins playing files in order byartist. The current artist playing isshown on the second line of thedisplay. Once all songs by that artist



are played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order andbegins playing files by that artist.

To listen to files by another artist,press the softkey below either arrowtab. The disc goes to the next orprevious artist in alphabetical order.Continue pressing either softkeybelow the arrow tab until the desiredartist displays.

To change from playback by artist toplayback by album:

1. Press the softkey below theSort By tab.

2. Press one of the softkeysbelow the Album tab from thesort screen.

3. Press the softkey below theBack tab to return to the mainmusic navigator screen.

The album name displays on thesecond line between the arrows,and songs from the current albumbegin to play. Once all songs fromthat album have played, the playermoves to the next album in

alphabetical order on the CD andbegins playing MP3s from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe softkey below the Back tab toreturn to normal MP3 playback.

CD Player Messages

CHECK DISC : If this messagedisplays and/or the CD ejects, itcould be for one of the followingreasons:

. It is very hot. When thetemperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. There was a problem whileburning the CD.

. The label is caught in the CDplayer.

If the CD is not playing correctly, forany other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.

Auxiliary Devices

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack

Radios with an auxiliary input jackon the lower right side can connectto an external audio device such asan iPod, MP3 player, or CD playerfor use as another source for audiolistening. This input jack is not anaudio output; do not plugheadphones into the front auxiliaryinput jack.

Drivers are encouraged to set upany auxiliary device while thevehicle is in P (Park). SeeDefensive Driving 0 161 for moreinformation on driver distraction.



To use a portable audio player,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe radio's front auxiliary input jack.When a device is connected, pressthe radio CD/AUX button to beginplaying audio from the device overthe vehicle speakers.

For optimal sound quality, increasethe portable audio device's volumeto the loudest level.

It is always best to power theportable audio device through itsown battery while playing.

O : Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the volume of the portableplayer. Additional volumeadjustments might have to be madefrom the portable device if thevolume is not loud or soft enough.

BAND : If equipped, press to listento the radio when a portable audiodevice is playing. The portableaudio device continues playing.

CD/AUX : If equipped, press to playa CD when a portable audio deviceis playing. Press again and thesystem begins playing audio from

the connected portable audio player.If a portable audio player is notconnected, “No Input Device Found”displays.

SRCE : If equipped, press to listento the radio when a portable audiodevice is playing. The portableaudio device continues playing.

Press to play a CD when a portableaudio device is playing. Press againand the system begins playingaudio from the connected portableaudio player. If a portable audioplayer is not connected, “No InputDevice Found” displays.

Using the USB Port

Radios with a USB port can controla USB storage device or an iPodusing the radio buttons and knobs.See “Playing an MP3” in CD Player0 136 for information about how toconnect and control a USB storagedevice or an iPod.

USB Support

If equipped, the USB port is on theinstrument panel and uses theUSB 2.0 standard.

USB-Supported Devices

. USB flash drive

. Portable USB hard drive

. Fifth generation or later iPod

. iPod nano

. iPod touch

. iPod classic

Not all iPods and USB drives arecompatible with the USB port.



Make sure the iPod has the latestfirmware from Apple for properoperation. iPod firmware can beupdated using the latest iTunesapplication. See www.apple.com/itunes.

For help with identifying the iPod, goto www.apple.com/support.

Radios that have a USB port canplay .mp3 and .wma files that arestored on a USB storage device aswell as AAC files that are stored onan iPod.

USB-Supported File and FolderStructure

The radio supports:

. Up to 700 folders.

. Up to eight folders in depth.

. Up to 65,535 files.

. Folder and file names up to64 bytes.

. Files with an .mp3 or .wma fileextension.

. AAC files stored on an iPod.

. FAT16.

. FAT32.

Connecting a USB StorageDevice or iPod

The USB port can be used tocontrol an iPod or a USB storagedevice.

To connect a USB storage device,connect the device to the USB porton the instrument panel.

To connect an iPod, connect oneend of the USB cable that camewith the iPod to the iPod’s dockconnector and connect the otherend to the USB port on theinstrument panel. If the vehicle is onand the USB connection works, “OKto disconnect” and a GM logo mayappear on the iPod, and iPodappears on the infotainment display.The iPod music appears on theinfotainment display and beginsplaying.

The iPod charges while it isconnected to the vehicle if theignition is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY. When the vehicle isturned off, the iPod automatically

powers off and will not charge ordraw power from the vehicle'sbattery.

If you have an older iPod model thatis not supported, it can still be usedby connecting it to the auxiliaryinput jack using a standard 3.5 mm(1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using theAuxiliary Input Jack” previously inthis section.

Using the Radio to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The radio can control a USBstorage device or an iPod using theradio buttons and knobs, and candisplay song information on theinfotainment display.

f : Turn to select files.

© SEEK : Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than 10 secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continuemoving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK : Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.



s REV : Press and hold to reverseplayback quickly. Sound is heard ata reduced volume. Releases REVto resume playing. The elapsed timeof the file displays.

\ FWD : Press and hold toadvance playback quickly. Sound isheard at a reduced volume. Release\ FWD to resume playing. Theelapsed time of the file displays.

4 : Press to display additionalinformation about the selected track.

Using Softkeys to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The five softkeys below theinfotainment display are used tocontrol the functions listed below.

To use the softkeys:

1. Press the first or fifth softkeybelow the infotainment displayto display the functions listedbelow, or press the softkeybelow the function if it iscurrently displayed.

2. Press the softkey below the tabwith the function on it to usethat function.

j : Press the softkey below j topause the track. The tab appearsraised when pause is being used.Press the softkey below j again toresume playback.

Back : Press the softkey below theBack tab to go back to the maindisplay screen on an iPod, or theroot directory on a USB storagedevice.

c : Press the softkey belowc toview the contents of the currentfolder on the USB drive. To browseand select files:

1. Press the softkey belowc.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof folders.

3. Press f to select the desiredfolder. If there is more then onefolder, repeat Steps 1 and 2until the desired folder isreached.

4. Turn f to scroll through thefiles in the selected folder.

5. Press f to select the desiredfile to be played.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:

. First softkey, first item in the list.

. Second softkey, 1% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Fourth softkey, 10% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.

h : Press the softkey belowhto view and select a file on an iPod,using the iPod's menu system. Filesare sorted by:

. Playlists

. Artists

. Albums


Infotainment System 145. Genres

. Songs

. Composers

To select files:

1. Press the softkey belowh.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof menus.

3. Press f to select thedesired menu.

4. Turn f to scroll through thefolders or files in theselected menu.

5. Press f to select the desiredfile to be played.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:

. First softkey, first item in the list.

. Second softkey, 1% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Fourth softkey, 10% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.

Repeat Functionality

To use Repeat:

Press the softkey below" or'to select between Repeat All andRepeat Track.

" : Press the softkey below" torepeat all tracks. The tab appearslowered when Repeat All is beingused. This is the default mode whena USB storage device or iPod is firstconnected.

' : Press the softkey below'to repeat one track. The tabappears raised when Repeat Trackis being used.

Shuffle Functionality

To use Shuffle:

Press the softkey below>,2,C , or= to select betweenShuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,or Shuffle Folder.

> : Press the softkey below2to turn shuffle off. This is the defaultmode when a USB storage deviceor iPod is first connected.

2 : Press the softkey below= orC to shuffle all songs onthe USB storage device or iPod.

C : Press the softkey below>to shuffle all songs in the currentalbum on an iPod.

= : Press the softkey below>to shuffle all songs in the currentfolder on a USB storage device.



OnStar SystemOnStar with 4G LTE

If equipped with OnStar 4G LTE, upto seven devices, such assmartphones, tablets, and laptops,can be connected to high-speedInternet through the vehicle’s built-inWi-Fi hotspot.

Call 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to connect to anOnStar Advisor for assistance. Seewww.onstar.com for a detailedinstruction guide, vehicle availability,details, and system limitations.Services and apps vary by make,model, year, carrier, availability, andconditions. 4G LTE service isavailable in select markets. 4G LTEperformance is based on industryaverages and vehicle systemsdesign. Some services require adata plan.

Phone

BluetoothFor vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:

. Placement and receipt of calls ina hands-free mode.

. Sharing of the cell phone’saddress book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:

. Become familiar with thefeatures of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.


Infotainment System 147. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.

The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section for more information.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list. See“Voice Pass-Thru” in this sectionfor more information.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section formore information.

{ Warning

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment system.Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

A Bluetooth system can use aBluetooth-capable cell phone with aHands-Free Profile to make and

receive phone calls. The systemcan be used while the ignition is onor in ACC/ACCESSORY. The rangeof the Bluetooth system can be upto 9.1 m (30 ft). Not all phonessupport all functions, and not allphones work with the in-vehicleBluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation on compatible phones inU.S. and Canada only.

Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

For additional information, say“Help” while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Noise : Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak : A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until the toneand then speak.

How to Speak : Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes through thevehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons on the steeringwheel to operate the in-vehicleBluetooth system. See SteeringWheel Controls 0 90.

b / g : Press to answer incomingcalls, confirm system information,and start speech recognition.

c /x : Press to end a call, rejecta call, or cancel an operation.



Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seethe cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if equipped. See OnStarOverview 0 330.

Pairing Information

. A Bluetooth phone with MP3capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To connect to adifferent paired phone, see“Connecting to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold b / g fortwo seconds.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Pair.” The systemresponds with instructions anda four-digit PersonalIdentification Number (PIN).The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want topair. For help with this process,see the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3. Afterthe PIN is successfully entered,the system prompts you toprovide a name for the pairedcell phone. This name will beused to indicate which phonesare paired and connected tothe vehicle. The systemresponds with “<phone name>has been successfully paired”after the pairing process iscomplete.

6. Repeat Steps 1–5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.




2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system askswhich phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”

. If another cell phone isfound, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to 30phone numbers as name tags in theHands-Free Directory that is sharedbetween the Bluetooth and OnStarsystems, if equipped.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store : This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store : This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete : This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags : Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands-Free CallingDirectory and the OnStarTurn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number orgroup of numbers you want tostore all at once with nopauses, then follow thedirections given by the systemto save a name tag for thisnumber.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.



To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone. Afterthe last digit has been entered,say “Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the systemto save a name tag for thisnumber.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands-FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call : The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial : This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re-dial : This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Calling Emergency

1. Press and hold b / g fortwo seconds. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.




3. Say [emergency number].



Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. Aftereach digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone. Afterthe last digit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re-dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.”


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b / g to answer the call.

. Pressc /x to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Pressc /x to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three-Way Calling

Three-way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.2. Say “Three-way call.”



3. Use the dial or call commandto dial the number of the thirdparty to be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b / g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Pressc /x to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

. To mute a call, press b / g , andthen say “Mute call.”

. To cancel mute, press b / g ,and then say “Un-mute call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can be

transferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to on.

Transferring Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

Transferring Audio to theBluetooth System from a CellPhone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b / g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on the cellphone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass-thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling a



menu-driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in-vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious section “Deleting a PairedPhone” and the previous sectionson deleting name tags.

Other Information

The Bluetooth word mark and logosare owned by the Bluetooth SIG,Inc. and any use of such marks by

General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement0 326.


154 Climate Controls

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . 154Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . 156Rear Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

MaintenanceService . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Climate Control SystemsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

Vehicles without Air Conditioning

1. Fan Control



9 : Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed.

9 : Turns the system off.

Temperature Control : Turn theknob clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease thetemperature inside the vehicle.

Air Delivery Mode Control : Turnthe knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to change thecurrent airflow mode.

H : Air is directed to the instrumentpanel outlets.


Climate Controls 155

) : Air is divided between theinstrument panel and floor outlets,with some air directed toward thewindshield.

6 : Air is directed to the flooroutlets with some air directed to thewindshield and side windows.

- : This mode clears the windowsof fog or moisture. Outside air isdirected to the floor and defrosteroutlets. Adjust the temperature knobfor warmer or cooler air. The airconditioning compressor might turnon in this setting to dehumidifythe air.

1 : This mode clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield, with some to the flooroutlets and front side windows. Theair conditioning compressor mightturn on in this setting to dehumidifythe air.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

Vehicles with Air Conditioning

1. Fan Control



4. Rear Window Defogger (IfEquipped)

On hot days, open the windows tolet hot inside air escape; then closethem. This helps to reduce the timeneeded for the vehicle to cool downand the system operates moreefficiently.

# : Cools and dehumidifies the airinside of the vehicle.

V : Cools the air inside the vehiclefaster, by recirculating the inside air.

Rear Window Defogger

If equipped with a rear windowdefogger, a warming grid is used toremove fog or frost from the rearwindow.

1 : Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to show thatthe rear window defogger is on.



The defogger only works when theignition is on. The defogger turns offif the ignition is turned off or to ACC/ACCESSORY.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

Caution

Do not use a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rearwindow. Do not adhere anythingto the defogger grid lines in therear glass. These actions maydamage the rear defogger.Repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Rear Heating SystemIf equipped, the rear heating systemlets you adjust the amount of airflowing into the rear of the vehicle,from the front seating area. Thisfeature works with the main climatecontrol system in the vehicle.

AUX : The thumbwheel for thissystem is on the instrument panelbelow the audio system.

9 : Turn the thumbwheel up ordown to increase or decrease theamount of heated air sent to therear seating area.

Q : This position supplies the mostamount of heat to the rearseating area.

c : This position supplies half theamount of heat to the rearseating area.

R : This position supplies the leastamount of heat to the rearseating area.

9 : This turns the rear heatingsystem off.

Rear Climate ControlSystemIf equipped with a rear heating andair conditioning system, it controlsthe temperature, fan speed, and airdelivery for the rear seatpassengers only. The front climatecontrol panel is in the overheadconsole between the driver andfront passenger.



Front Climate Control Panel

1. Fan Control



Use this control panel to maintain aseparate temperature setting. Adjustthe direction of the airflow or adjustthe fan speed for the rear seatpassenger(s).

When the fan knob is in the AUXposition, the rear climate controlpanel can be used to adjust theclimate settings in the rearseating area.



Rear Climate Control Panel

1. Fan Control



For vehicles with a rear climatecontrol panel, it is located overheadbehind the driver and frontpassenger, centered in front of thesecond row. To adjust the rearclimate control panel settings by arear seat passenger, the frontclimate control panel fan knob mustbe in the AUX position. The fanspeed, air delivery mode, andtemperature can then be adjusted.

AUX : Turn the fan knob on thefront climate control panel to AUX tolet rear seat passengers use thecontrol panel in the rear seatingarea. This disables the front controlpanel. To return control to the frontpanel, move the fan knob outof AUX.

9 : Turns the system off.

9 : Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed in the rearseating area.

Temperature Control : Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease thetemperature in the rearseating area.

The air conditioning system on themain climate control panel must beturned on to direct cooled air to therear of the vehicle. If it is not on,then the temperature in the rear ofthe vehicle remains at cabintemperature.

Air Delivery Mode Control : Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the direction of the airflow inthe rear seating area.

To change the current mode, selectone of the following:

H : Air is directed to the upperoutlets, with some directed to thefloor outlets.

2 : Air is directed to the flooroutlets.



Be sure to keep the area under thefront seats clear of any objects sothat the air inside of the vehicle cancirculate effectively.

For information on how to use themain climate control system, seeClimate Control Systems 0 154. Forinformation on ventilation, see AirVents 0 159.

Air VentsUse the outlets located near thecenter and on the sides of theinstrument panel to change thedirection of airflow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow or

leaves from the air inlets at thebase of the windshield that mayblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors may adversely affectthe performance of the system.

. Clear snow off the hood toimprove visibility and helpdecrease moisture drawn intothe vehicle.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

Maintenance

ServiceAll vehicles have a label underhoodthat identifies the refrigerant used inthe vehicle. The refrigerant systemshould only be serviced by trainedand certified technicians. The airconditioning evaporator shouldnever be repaired or replaced byone from a salvage vehicle.It should only be replaced by a newevaporator to ensure proper andsafe operation.

During service, all refrigerantsshould be reclaimed with properequipment. Venting refrigerantsdirectly to the atmosphere is harmfulto the environment and may alsocreate unsafe conditions based oninhalation, combustion, frostbite,or other health-based concerns.


160 Driving and Operating

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 162Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 163Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . 164Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 165Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 166Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . 171Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 173Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . 175Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . 180Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . 186

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Driver Assistance SystemsRear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . 191Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 196Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Trailer TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . 209

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210


Driving and Operating 161

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, keepyour eyes on the road, keep yourhands on the steering wheel, andfocus your attention on driving.

. Do not use a phone indemanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem and the navigation system,if equipped, including pairing andusing a cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe seat belt. See Seat Belts 0 47.

. Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.


162 Driving and Operating. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:

. Keep enough distance betweenyou and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.

Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Hydraulic Power Steering

Your vehicle has hydraulic powersteering. It may requiremaintenance. See Power SteeringFluid 0 233.

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops orbecause of a system malfunction,the vehicle can be steered but mayrequire increased effort. See yourdealer if there is a problem.

Caution

If the steering wheel is turneduntil it reaches the end of itstravel, and is held in that positionfor more than 15 seconds,damage may occur to the powersteering system and there may beloss of power steering assist.



Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.

. Reduce speed before entering acurve.

. Maintain a reasonable steadyspeed through the curve.

. Wait until the vehicle is out ofthe curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:

. Braking Skid — wheels are notrolling.

. Steering or Cornering Skid —too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:


164 Driving and Operating. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep-standing or flowing water.

{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicle

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

occupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:

. Allow extra following distance.

. Pass with caution.


Driving and Operating 165. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.

. Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

. Have good tires with propertread depth. See Tires 0 253.

. Turn off cruise control.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips include:

. Keep the vehicle serviced and ingood shape.

. Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow thevehicle on a long downhill slopecan cause brake overheating, can

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

reduce brake performance, andcould result in a loss of braking.Shift the transmission to a lowergear to let the engine assist thebrakes on a steep downhill slope.

{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. This can causeoverheating of the brakes andloss of steering assist. Alwayshave the engine running and thevehicle in gear.

. Drive at speeds that keep thevehicle in its own lane. Do notswing wide or cross thecenter line.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(e.g., stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (e.g., falling rocks area,winding roads, long grades,passing or no-passing zones)and take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Snow or ice between the tires andthe road creates less traction orgrip, so drive carefully. Wet ice canoccur at about 0 °C (32 °F) whenfreezing rain begins to fall. Avoiddriving on wet ice or in freezing rainuntil roads can be treated.

For slippery road driving:

. Accelerate gently. Acceleratingtoo quickly causes the wheels tospin and makes the surfaceunder the tires slick.

. Turn on Traction Control. SeeTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 186.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves vehicle stability duringhard stops, but the brakesshould be applied sooner than



when on dry pavement. SeeAntilock Brake System (ABS)0 184.

. Allow greater following distanceand watch for slippery spots. Icypatches can occur on otherwiseclear roads in shaded areas.The surface of a curve or anoverpass can remain icy whenthe surrounding roads are clear.Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

. Turn off cruise control.

Blizzard Conditions

Stop the vehicle in a safe place andsignal for help. Stay with the vehicleunless there is help nearby.If possible, use RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program 0 320. To gethelp and keep everyone in thevehicle safe:


. Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO), whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in snow:

. Clear snow from the base ofthe vehicle, especially anyblocking the exhaust pipe.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the vehicle sidethat is away from the wind,to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to circulate the airinside the vehicle and set

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the fan speed to the highestsetting. See “ClimateControl Systems.”

For more information about CO,see Engine Exhaust 0 179.

To save fuel, run the engine forshort periods to warm the vehicleand then shut the engine off andpartially close the window. Movingabout to keep warm also helps.

If it takes time for help to arrive,when running the engine, push theaccelerator pedal slightly so theengine runs faster than the idlespeed. This keeps the batterycharged to restart the vehicle and tosignal for help with the headlamps.Do this as little as possible, tosave fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.



If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control0 186.

{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a lowforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until the

wheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle 0 287.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle mayshow how much weight it wasdesigned to carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoreduce stopping distance,damage the tires, and shortenthe life of the vehicle.



Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar). The tire and loadinginformation label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thesize of the original equipmenttires (3) and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures (4).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires 0 253and Tire Pressure 0 261.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It mayshow the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) forthe front and rear axle. See“Certification/Tire Label” later inthis section.

“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit–

1. Locate the statement "Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount ofcargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the"XXX" amount equals1400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb passengers inyour vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safely



exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine howthis reduces the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity of your vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing 0 202 forimportant information on towing atrailer, towing safety rules andtrailering tips.

Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =136 kg (300 lbs)

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs)

Example 2

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 136 kg(750 lbs)

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs)



Example 3

1. Maximum Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 3 =453 kg (1,000 lbs)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =453 kg (1,000 lbs)

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs)

Refer to the vehicle tire andloading information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to the rearedge of the driver door. Thelabel may show the size of thevehicle's original tires and theinflation pressures needed toobtain the gross weight capacityof the vehicle. This is calledGross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsomay show the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). To find out the actualloads on the front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weighstation and weigh the vehicle.Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out theload equally on both sides of thecenterline.

{ Warning

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. When you carrysomething inside thevehicle, secure itwhenever you can.

. Do not leave a seatfolded down unless youneed to.

Add-On Equipment

When carrying removable items,a limit on how many peoplecarried inside the vehicle maybe necessary. Be sure to weighthe vehicle before buying andinstalling the new equipment.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-In

Caution

The vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it willperform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

. Keep the vehicle speed at88 km/h (55 mph) or less forthe first 805 km (500mi).

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500 mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can mean

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

premature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towing0 202 for the trailer towingcapabilities of the vehicleand more information.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.



Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brakepedal applied.

0 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF) : When the vehicle is stopped,turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 175.

This position locks the ignition andtransmission.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle toa safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn theignition to LOCK/OFF. Onvehicles with an automatictransmission, the shift levermust be in P (Park) to turn theignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake 0 185.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

Caution

Using a tool to force the key toturn in the ignition could causedamage to the switch or break thekey. Use the correct key, makesure it is all the way in, and turn itonly with your hand. If the keycannot be turned by hand, seeyour dealer.



1 (ACC/ACCESSORY) : This is theposition in which you can operatethings like the radio and thewindshield wipers when the engineis off.

2 (ON/RUN) : This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument cluster warning andindicator lights. This position canalso be used for service anddiagnostics, and to verify the properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp as may be requiredfor emission inspection purposes.The switch stays in this positionwhen the engine is running.

If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionwith the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. You may not be able tostart the vehicle if the battery isallowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

3 (START) : This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN fordriving.

A warning tone will sound when thedriver door is opened, the ignition isin ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFFand the key is in the ignition.

Starting the EngineIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

To place the transmission in theproper gear:

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipment0 210.

Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

Caution

If the steering wheel is turneduntil it reaches the end of itstravel, and is held in that positionwhile starting the vehicle, damagemay occur to the hydraulic powersteering system and there may beloss of power steering assist.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off theaccelerator pedal, turn theignition key to START. Whenthe engine starts, let go of thekey. The idle speed will godown as your engine getswarm. Do not race the engine



immediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allow theoil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

When the Low Fuel warninglamp is on and the FUELLEVEL LOW message isdisplayed in the DriverInformation Center (DIC), theComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem is disabled to preventpossible vehicle componentdamage. When this happens,hold the ignition switch in theSTART position to continueengine cranking.

Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

battery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not startafter 5-10 seconds, especiallyin very cold weather (below−18 °C or 0 °F), it could beflooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and holding it there asyou hold the key in START forup to 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try,to allow the cranking motor tocool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key andaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, dothe same thing. This clears theextra gasoline from the engine.Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine and

transmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Fast Idle SystemIf equipped, this feature is availableonly with cruise control. The manualfast idle switch is operated using thecruise control buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel.

This system can be used toincrease engine idle speedwhenever the following conditionsare met:

. The parking brake is set.

. The brake pedal is not pressed.

. The vehicle must not be movingand the accelerator must not bepressed.

To control the fast idle:

. To enable the Fast Idle System,press and release the cruisecontrol on/off button and ensurethat the switch indicator lightis lit.


Driving and Operating 175. Press and release the cruise

control SET- button. Enginespeed will be held atapproximately 1200 rpm.

When the fast idle is active, theDriver Information Center (DIC) willdisplay FAST IDLE ON.

One of the following actions will turnoff the fast idle:

. Pressing the brake.

. Selecting the cruise controlcancel button.

. Releasing the parking brake.

. Moving the transmission shiftlever out of P (Park) orN (Neutral).

. Selecting the cruise control on/off button when it waspreviously on.

. Pressing the cruise control SET-button a second time.

. Pressing the accelerator morethan one-quarter of theway down.

. Turning the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:

. Audio System

. Power Windows (if equipped)

These features will work when theignition key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key isturned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,power to the radio and powerwindows will continue to work10 minutes or until the driver door isopened.

Engine Coolant HeaterIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

{ Warning

Do not plug in the engine blockheater while the vehicle is parkedin a garage or under a carport.Property damage or personalinjury may result. Always park thevehicle in a clear open area awayfrom buildings or structures.

The engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during enginewarm-up in cold weather conditionsat or below −18 °C (0 °F). Vehicleswith an engine coolant heatershould be plugged in at least fourhours before starting. An internalthermostat in the plug end of thecord may exist which will preventengine coolant heater operation attemperatures above −18 °C (0 °F).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord.



The cord for the engine coolantheater is on the driver side ofthe engine compartment and isattached to the hose for thepower steering reservoir.

Check the heater cord fordamage. If it is damaged, donot use it. See your dealer fora replacement. Inspect thecord for damage yearly.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ Warning

Improper use of the heater cordor an extension cord can damagethe cord and may result inoverheating and fire.

. Plug the cord into athree-prong electrical utilityreceptacle that is protectedby a ground fault detection

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

function. An ungroundedoutlet could cause anelectric shock.

. Use a weatherproof,heavy-duty, 15 amp-ratedextension cord if needed.Failure to use therecommended extensioncord in good operatingcondition, or using adamaged heater orextension cord, could makeit overheat and cause a fire,property damage, electricshock, and injury.

. Do not operate the vehiclewith the heater cordpermanently attached to the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle. Possible heatercord and thermostatdamage could occur.

. While in use, do not let theheater cord touch vehicleparts or sharp edges. Neverclose the hood on theheater cord.

. Before starting the vehicle,unplug the cord, reattachthe cover to the plug, andsecurely fasten the cord.Keep the cord away fromany moving parts.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine partsand prevent damage.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.



Shifting Into Park1. Hold the brake pedal down,

then set the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into theP (Park) position by pulling theshift lever toward you andmoving it up as far as it will go.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take itwith you. If you can leave thevehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, the vehicle isin P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.It could overheat and catch fire.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park 0 177.If you are towing a trailer, seeDriving Characteristics andTowing Tips 0 200.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set. After theshift lever is moved into P (Park),hold the regular brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shiftlever away from P (Park) without

first pulling it toward you. If you can,it means that the shift lever was notfully locked into P (Park).

Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift the transmission intoP (Park) properly, the weight of thevehicle can put too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. It might be difficult topull the shift lever out of P (Park).This is called torque lock. Toprevent torque lock, set the parkingbrake and then shift into P (Park)properly before you leave the driverseat. To find out how, see ShiftingInto Park 0 177.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforereleasing the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mightneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission. Then youshould be able to pull the shift leverout of P (Park).



Shifting out of ParkThe vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You have to fully apply thebrakes before you can shift fromP (Park) when the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. SeeAutomatic Transmission 0 180.

The shift lock control system isdesigned to:

. Prevent the ignition key frombeing removed unless the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regularbrake pedal is applied.

The shift lock control system isalways functional except in the caseof a dead battery or low voltage(less than 9 V) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting - NorthAmerica 0 284.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Ease the pressure on the shiftlever.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, push the shift lever allthe way into P (Park).

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you are still having a problemshifting, have the vehicle serviced.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.



Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO), which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:

. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation(parking garages, tunnels,deep snow that may blockunderbody airflow or tailpipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified,damaged, or improperlyrepaired.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with thewindows completely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park 0 177 andEngine Exhaust 0 179.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips 0 200.



AutomaticTransmissionA shift position indicator is in theinstrument cluster.

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

See “Range Selection Mode” underManual Mode 0 183.

P : This position locks the rearwheels. It is the best position to usewhen starting the engine becausethe vehicle cannot move easily.When parked on a hill, especiallywhen the vehicle has a heavy load,you might notice an increase in theeffort to shift out of P (Park). See“Torque Lock” under Shifting IntoPark 0 177.

{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park 0 177 andDriving Characteristics andTowing Tips 0 200.

R : Use this gear to back up.

Caution

Shifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. The

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck 0 166.

N : In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels.To restart when you are alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only. Also,use N (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hit

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

people or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Caution

Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

Caution

A transmission hot message maydisplay if the automatictransmission fluid is too hot.Driving under this condition candamage the vehicle. Stop and idle

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

the engine to cool the automatictransmission fluid. This messageclears when the transmission fluidhas cooled sufficiently.

D : This position is for normaldriving. It provides the best fueleconomy. If you need more powerfor passing, and you are:

. Going less than about 55 km/h(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

By doing this, the vehicle shiftsdown to the next gear and hasmore power.

D (Drive) can be used when towinga trailer, carrying a heavy load,or driving on steep hills. You mightwant to shift the transmission to alower gear selection if thetransmission shifts too often.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See “Skidding” underLoss of Control 0 163.

The vehicle has a shift stabilizationfeature that adjusts the transmissionshifting to the current drivingconditions in order to reduce rapidupshifts and downshifts. This shiftstabilization feature is designed todetermine, before making anupshift, if the engine is able tomaintain vehicle speed by analyzingthings such as vehicle speed,throttle position, and vehicle load.If the shift stabilization featuredetermines that a current vehiclespeed cannot be maintained, thetransmission does not upshift andinstead holds the current gear.In some cases, this could appear tobe a delayed shift, however thetransmission is operating normally.

The transmission uses adaptiveshift controls. Adaptive shift controlscontinually compare key shiftparameters to pre-programmedideal shifts stored in thetransmission’s computer. The



transmission constantly makesadjustments to improve vehicleperformance according to how thevehicle is being used, such as witha heavy load or when thetemperature changes. During thisadaptive shift control process,shifting might feel different as thetransmission determines the bestsettings.

The shift quality of a new vehiclemay not be ideal because theadaptive shift control process maynot have determined the bestsettings for a particular shift orcondition. Shift quality will improvewith continued driving.

When temperatures are very cold,the transmission's gear shiftingcould be delayed, providing morestable shifts until the engine warmsup. Shifts could be more noticeablewith a cold transmission. Thisdifference in shifting is normal.

M : This position lets drivers selectthe range of gears appropriate forcurrent driving conditions. If the

vehicle has this feature, see “RangeSelection Mode” under ManualMode 0 183.

1 : This position reduces vehiclespeed without using the brakes.You can use it for major/severedowngrades where the vehiclewould otherwise accelerate due tosteepness of grade. When you shiftto 1 (First) it provides the lowestgear appropriate to current roadspeed and continues to downshiftas the vehicle slows, eventuallydownshifting to 1 (First) gear. Thetransmission can be held in 1 (First)gear using Range Selection Modeor the shift lever. See “RangeSelection Mode” under ManualMode 0 183.

Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hillusing only the accelerator pedalmay damage the transmission.The repair will not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. If the vehicle

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

is stuck, do not spin the tires.When stopping on a hill, use thebrakes to hold the vehicle inplace.

Normal Mode Grade Braking

This mode is enabled when thevehicle is started, but is not enabledin Range Selection Mode. It assistsin maintaining desired vehiclespeeds when driving on downhillgrades by using the engine andtransmission to slow the vehicle.The first time the system activatesfor each ignition key cycle.

To disable or enable Normal ModeGrade Braking within the currentignition key cycle, press and holdthe Tow/Haul button forthree seconds.

For other forms of grade braking,see Tow/Haul Mode 0 184 andCruise Control 0 189.



Manual Mode

Range Selection Mode

If equipped, Range Selection Modehelps control the vehicle'stransmission and vehicle speedwhile driving downhill or towing atrailer by letting you select a desiredrange of gears.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the +/− buttons on theshift lever to select the desiredrange of gears for currentdriving conditions.

When M (Manual Mode) is selected,the transmission will downshift anda number displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) next tothe M indicating the current gear.

This number is the highest gear thatcan be used. However, the vehiclecan automatically shift to lowergears as it adjusts to drivingconditions. This means that allgears below that number areavailable. When 5 (Fifth) is selected,1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears areautomatically shifted by the vehicle,but 6 (Sixth) cannot be used untilthe +/− button on the shift lever isused to change to the gear.

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode 0 184.

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/HaulMode can be used.

Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hillusing only the accelerator pedalmay damage the transmission.The repair will not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. If the vehicleis stuck, do not spin the tires.When stopping on a hill, use thebrakes to hold the vehicle inplace.



Tow/Haul Mode

If equipped, Tow/Haul Mode adjuststhe transmission shift pattern toreduce shift cycling, providingincreased performance, vehiclecontrol, and transmission coolingwhen towing or hauling heavy loads.

Turn the Tow/Haul Mode on and offby pressing the button on theinstrument panel. When Tow/Haul ison, a light on the instrument clusterwill come on.

See Tow/Haul Mode Light 0 106.

Also see “Tow/Haul Mode” underTowing Equipment 0 207.

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking isonly enabled while the Tow/HaulMode is selected and the vehicle isnot in the Range Selection Mode.See “Tow/Haul Mode” listedpreviously and Manual Mode 0 183.Tow/Haul Mode Grade Brakingassists in maintaining desiredvehicle speeds when driving ondownhill grades by using the engineand transmission to slow thevehicle.

To disable or enable Tow/Haul ModeGrade Braking within the currentignition key cycle, press and holdthe Tow/Haul button forthree seconds.

See Towing Equipment 0 207.

For other forms of grade braking,see Automatic Transmission 0 180and Cruise Control 0 189.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has an Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself.A momentary motor or clicking noisemay be heard while this test is goingon, and it may even be noticed thatthe brake pedal moves a little. Thisis normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Light0 106.



If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses the wheels areslowing down. If one of the wheelsis about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes ateach wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpyou steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You may hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate. This isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brakeat the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal, then pushdown the parking brake pedal.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down. Pullthe handle, located just above theparking brake pedal, with theparking brake symbol, to release theparking brake.

If the ignition is on when the parkingbrake is released, the brake systemwarning light will go off.

Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake systemand cause premature wear ordamage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.



If you are towing a trailer and areparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips0 200.

Brake AssistThe Brake Assist feature isdesigned to assist the driver instopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedal asthe driving situation dictates. TheBrake Assist feature willautomatically disengage when the

brake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)If equipped, this feature will preventthe vehicle from rolling when itattempts to move on a moderate tosteep hill. During the transition whenthe brake pedal is released and theaccelerator pedal is pressed, HSAuses braking pressure to hold thevehicle stationary for a few secondsdepending on the steepness of thehill. After this transition or after theaccelerator pedal is pressed, thebrake will automatically release.HSA only activates when the driverdoor is closed. HSA will not activatein a forward drive gear when facingdownhill, or in R (Reverse) whenfacing uphill. If the brake pedal isreleased and then reapplied whileHSA is activated, the brake pedalmay feel firmer with less pedaltravel.

Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl

System Operation

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and StabiliTrak, anelectronic stability control system.These systems help limit wheel spinand assist the driver in maintainingcontrol, especially on slippery roadconditions.

TCS activates if it senses any of thedrive wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When thishappens, TCS applies the brakes tothe spinning wheels and reducesengine power to limit wheel spin.

StabiliTrak activates when thevehicle senses a difference betweenthe intended path and the directionthe vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak selectively appliesbraking pressure to any one of thevehicle wheel brakes to assist thedriver in keeping the vehicle on the



intended path. Trailer Sway Control(TSC) is also on automatically whenthe vehicle is started. See TrailerSway Control (TSC) 0 209.

If cruise control is being used andtraction control or StabiliTrak beginsto limit wheel spin, cruise control willdisengage. Cruise control may beturned back on when roadconditions allow.

Both systems come onautomatically when the vehicle isstarted and begins to move. Thesystems may be heard or felt whilethey are operating or whileperforming diagnostic checks. Thisis normal and does not mean thereis a problem with the vehicle.

It is recommended to leave bothsystems on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn TCS off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 166and “Turning the Systems Off andOn” later in this section.

The indicator light for both systemsis in the instrument cluster. Thislight will:

. Flash when TCS is limitingwheel spin.

. Flash when StabiliTrak isactivated.

. Turn on and stay on when eithersystem is not working.

If either system fails to turn on or toactivate, a message displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC), andd comes on and stays on toindicate that the system is inactiveand is not assisting the driver inmaintaining control. The vehicle issafe to drive, but driving should beadjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

Drive the vehicle. If d comes onand stays on, the vehicle may needmore time to diagnose the problem.If the condition persists, see yourdealer.

Turning the Systems Offand On



Caution

Do not repeatedly brake oraccelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle driveline could bedamaged.

To turn off only TCS, press andrelease g. The appropriatemessage will display in the DIC. Toturn TCS on again, press andrelease g.

If TCS is limiting wheel spin when gis pressed, the system will not turnoff until the wheels stop spinning.

To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,press and hold g until the

StabiliTrak OFF light g comes onand stays on in the instrumentcluster, then release. Theappropriate message will display inthe DIC.

To turn TCS and StabiliTrak onagain, press and release g. TheStabiliTrak OFF light g in theinstrument cluster turns off.

StabiliTrak will automatically turnback on if the vehicle exceeds32 km/h (20 mph). TCS will remainoff until g is pressed or the ignitionis cycled off then on.

The vehicle has a Trailer SwayControl (TSC) feature and a HillStart Assist (HSA) feature.See Trailer Sway Control (TSC)0 209 or Hill Start Assist (HSA)0 186.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 213.

Locking Rear AxleVehicles with a locking rear axle cangive more traction on snow, mud,ice, sand, or gravel. It works like astandard axle most of the time, butwhen traction is low, this feature willallow the rear wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle.



Cruise Control

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. Do not usecruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

If equipped with cruise control, aspeed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) ormore can be maintained withoutkeeping your foot on theaccelerator. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 40 km/h(25 mph).

If the Traction Control System (TCS)or StabiliTrak electronic stabilitycontrol system begins to limit wheelspin while using cruise control, thecruise control automatically

disengages. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 186.When road conditions allow you tosafely use it again, cruise controlcan be turned back on.

If the brakes are applied, cruisecontrol disengages.

I : Press to turn cruise control onor off. The white indicator comes onin the instrument cluster whencruise control is turned on.

+RES : If there is a set speed inmemory, press briefly to resume thatspeed or press and hold to

accelerate. If cruise control isalready active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET− : Press briefly to set thespeed and activate cruise control.If cruise control is already active,use to decrease vehicle speed.

[ : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

IfI is on when not in use, theSET− or +RES button could getpressed and go into cruise when notdesired. KeepI off when cruise isnot being used.

To set a speed:

1. PressI to turn the cruisesystem on.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release SET−.

4. Remove your foot from theaccelerator.



The cruise control indicator on theinstrument cluster turns green aftercruise control has been set to thedesired speed. See InstrumentCluster 0 97.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied or [ is pressed, thecruise control is disengaged withouterasing the set speed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reachesabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,briefly press +RES. The vehiclereturns to the previous set speed.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:

. Press and hold +RES until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, briefly press+RES. For each press, the

vehicle goes about1 km/h (Metric display) or1 mph (English display) faster.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Driver Information Center(DIC) 0 109. The increment valueused depends on the unitsdisplayed.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:

. Press and hold SET– until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To slow down in smallincrements, briefly press SET–.For each press, the vehicle goesabout 1 km/h (Metric display) or1 mph (English display) slower.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Driver Information Center(DIC) 0 109. The increment valueused depends on the unitsdisplayed.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise speed. Whilepressing the accelerator pedal orshortly following the release tooverride cruise control, brieflypressing SET– will result in cruiseset to the current vehicle speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends on the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,pressing the accelerator pedal maybe necessary to maintain vehiclespeed. When going downhill, CruiseGrade Braking helps maintain thedriver selected speed.

Cruise Grade Braking is enabledwhen the vehicle is started andcruise control is active. It assists inmaintaining driver selected speed



when driving on downhill grades byusing the engine and transmissionto slow the vehicle.

If the brake pedal is applied, cruisecontrol will disengage.

Ending Cruise Control

There are four ways to end cruisecontrol:

. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press [.

. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

. To turn off cruise control,pressI.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory ifI ispressed or if the vehicle isturned off.

Driver AssistanceSystems

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If equipped, the RVC system isdesigned to help the driver whenbacking up by displaying a view ofthe area behind the vehicle.

{ Warning

The camera(s) do not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,crossing traffic, animals, or anyother object outside of thecameras’ field of view, below thebumper, or under the vehicle.Shown distances may be differentfrom actual distances. Do notdrive or park the vehicle usingonly these camera(s). Alwayscheck behind and around thevehicle before driving. Failure touse proper care may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.

When the vehicle is on and shiftedinto R (Reverse), the video imageappears on the inside rearviewmirror. The video image disappearsafter the vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse).

RVC Location

The camera is next to the licenseplate.



1. View displayed by thecamera

1. View displayed by thecamera

2. Corners of the rear bumper

Displayed images may be further orcloser than they appear. The areadisplayed is limited and objects thatare close to either corner of thebumper or under the bumper do notdisplay.

When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

The RVC system might not workproperly or display a clear image if:

. It is dark.

. The sun or the beam ofheadlamps is shining directlyinto the camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is in anaccident. The position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

Troubleshooting


Parking AssistIf equipped, the Rear Parking Assist(RPA) system uses sensors on therear bumper to assist with parkingand avoiding objects while inR (Reverse).

{ Warning

The parking assist system doesnot detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectsbelow the bumper or that are tooclose or too far from the vehicle.It is not available at speedsgreater than 8 km/h (5 mph). Toprevent injury, death, or vehicledamage, even with parking assist,always check the area around thevehicle and check all mirrorsbefore backing.



How the System Works

RPA comes on automatically whenthe shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single beep soundsto indicate the system is working.

RPA operates only at speeds lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph).

An obstacle detection is indicatedby beeps. The time between beepsgets shorter as the vehicleapproaches the obstacle. Repeatedbeeps are heard when the distanceis less than 30 cm (12 in).

To be detected, objects must be atleast 25 cm (10 in) off the groundand below rear door level. Objectsmust also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) fromthe rear bumper. This distance maybe less during warmer or humidweather.

Turning the System On and Off

The system can be disabled throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See “Park Assist” under DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 109.

RPA defaults to the on setting eachtime the vehicle is started.

Turn RPA off when towing a trailer.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The following messages may bedisplayed on the DIC:

SERVICE PARK ASSIST : If thismessage occurs, take the vehicle toyour dealer for repair.

PARK ASSIST OFF : This messageoccurs if the driver disables thesystem or if the vehicle is drivenabove 8 km/h (5 mph) inR (Reverse).

PARK ASST BLOCKED SEEOWNERS MANUAL : Thismessage can occur under thefollowing conditions:

. The sensors are not clean. Keepthe rear bumper free of mud,dirt, snow, ice, slush, and frost.The message may not clear untilfrost or ice has melted all aroundand inside the sensor.

. A trailer is attached to thevehicle, or a bicycle or an objecthanging out of the rear doorduring the current or last drive

cycle. RPA will return to normaloperation after it is determinedthe object is removed. Thiscould take a few drive cycles.

. A tow bar is attached to thevehicle.

Other conditions may affect systemperformance, such as vibrationsfrom a jackhammer or thecompression of air brakes on a verylarge truck.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If equipped, the SBZA system is alane-changing aid that assistsdrivers with avoiding crashes thatoccur with moving vehicles in theside blind zone (or spot) areas. TheSBZA warning display will light up inthe corresponding outside sidemirror and will flash if the turn signalis on.



{ Warning

SBZA does not alert the driver tovehicles rapidly approachingoutside of the side blind zones,pedestrians, bicyclists,or animals. It may not providealerts when changing lanes underall driving conditions. Failure touse proper care when changinglanes may result in injury, death,or vehicle damage. Beforemaking a lane change, alwayscheck mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and use the turnsignals.

SBZA Detection Zones

The SBZA sensor covers a zone ofapproximately one lane over fromboth sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m(11 ft). The height of the zone isapproximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. Thiszone starts at approximately themiddle of the vehicle and goes back8 m (26 ft).

How the System Works

The SBZA symbol lights up in theside mirrors when the systemdetects a moving vehicle in the next

lane over that is in the side blindzone. This indicates it may beunsafe to change lanes. Beforemaking a lane change, check theSBZA display, check mirrors, glanceover your shoulder, and use the turnsignals.

Left Side MirrorDisplay

Right Side MirrorDisplay

When the vehicle is started, bothoutside mirror SBZA displays willbriefly come on to indicate thesystem is operating. When thevehicle is in a forward gear, the leftor right side mirror display will lightup if a moving vehicle is detected inthat blind zone. If the turn signal isactivated in the same direction of adetected vehicle, this display willflash as an extra warning not tochange lanes.



SBZA can be disabled through theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Driver Information Center (DIC)0 109. If SBZA is disabled by thedriver, the SBZA mirror displays willnot light up.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

SBZA displays may not come onwhen passing a vehicle quickly, fora stopped vehicle, or when towing atrailer. The SBZA detection zonesthat extend back from the side ofthe vehicle do not move further backwhen a trailer is towed. Use cautionwhile changing lanes when towing atrailer. SBZA may alert to objectsattached to the vehicle, such as atrailer, bicycle, or object extendingout to either side of the vehicle. Thisis normal system operation; thevehicle does not need service.

SBZA may not always alert thedriver to vehicles in the side blindzone, especially in wet conditions.The system does not need to beserviced. The system may light updue to guardrails, signs, trees,

shrubs, and other non-movingobjects. This is normal systemoperation; the vehicle does not needservice.

SBZA may not operate when theSBZA sensors in the left or rightcorners of the rear bumper arecovered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,or slush, or in heavy rainstorms. Forcleaning instructions, see "Washingthe Vehicle" under Exterior Care0 290. If the DIC displays thesystem unavailable message aftercleaning both sides of the vehicletoward the rear corners of thevehicle, see your dealer.

If the SBZA displays do not light upwhen vehicles are in the blind zoneand the system is clean, the systemmay need service. Take the vehicleto your dealer.

Radio Frequency Information


FuelFor diesel engine vehicles, see“Fuel for Diesel Engines” in theDuramax diesel supplement.

GM recommends the use of TOPTIER® detergent gasoline to keepthe engine cleaner and reduceengine deposits. Seewww.toptiergas.com for a list of TOPTIER detergent gasoline marketersand applicable countries.

If the vehicle has a yellow fuel capor a yellow sticker on the fuel door,E85 or FlexFuel can be used. SeeE85 or FlexFuel 0 197.



Use regular unleaded gasolinemeeting ASTM specification D4814with a posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. Do not use gasoline with aposted octane rating of less than 87,as this may cause engine knock andwill lower fuel economy.

Prohibited Fuels

Caution

Do not use fuels with any of thefollowing conditions; doing somay damage the vehicle and voidits warranty:

. For vehicles which are notFlexFuel, fuel labeledgreater than 15% ethanol byvolume, such as mid-levelethanol blends (16 – 50%ethanol), E85, or FlexFuel.

. Fuel with any amount ofmethanol, methylal, andaniline. These fuels cancorrode metal fuel systemparts or damage plastic andrubber parts.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

. Fuel containing metals suchas methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl(MMT), which can damagethe emissions controlsystem and spark plugs.

. Fuel with a posted octanerating of less than therecommended fuel. Usingthis fuel will lower fueleconomy and performance,and may decrease the life ofthe emissions catalyst.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting

federal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance may beaffected. The malfunction indicatorlamp could turn on and the vehiclemay not pass a smog-check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) 0 103. If thisoccurs, return to your authorizeddealer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition iscaused by the type of fuel used,repairs may not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesThe U.S., Canada, and Mexico postfuel octane ratings in anti-knockindex (AKI). For fuel not to use in aforeign country, see “ProhibitedFuels” in Fuel 0 195.

Fuel AdditivesTo keep fuel systems clean, TOPTIER detergent gasoline isrecommended. See Fuel 0 195.



If TOP TIER detergent gasoline isnot available, one bottle of GM FuelSystem Treatment Cleaner added tothe fuel tank at every engine oilchange, can help. GM Fuel SystemTreatment Cleaner is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

If your vehicle is able to use E85 orFlexFuel, GM Fuel SystemTreatment Cleaner - FlexFuel is theonly recommended additive for use.Do not use any other additives withan E85 or FlexFuel vehicle. SeeE85 or FlexFuel 0 197.

E85 or FlexFuelVehicles with a yellow fuel cap canuse either unleaded gasoline or fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).All other vehicles should use onlythe unleaded gasoline as describedin Fuel 0 195.

The use of E85 or FlexFuel isencouraged when the vehicle isdesigned to use it. E85 or FlexFuelis made from renewable sources.

To help locate fuel stations thatcarry E85 or FlexFuel, the U.S.Department of Energy has analternative fuels website. Seewww.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations.

E85 or FlexFuel should meet ASTMSpecification D 5798 or CAN/CGSB–3.512 in Canada. Do not usethe fuel if the ethanol content isgreater than 85%. Fuel mixtures thatdo not meet ASTM or CGSBspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on.

After refueling, the vehiclecalculates the composition of thefuel. It is not recommended torepeatedly switch between fuels.If fuels are switched frequently, addas much fuel as possible and do notadd less than 11 L (3 gal) whenrefueling. Drive at least 11 km (7 mi)immediately after refueling to allowthe vehicle to adapt to the change inethanol concentration.

Because E85 or FlexFuel has lessenergy per liter (gallon) thangasoline, the vehicle will need to berefilled more often. See Filling theTank 0 198.

Caution

Some additives are notcompatible with E85 or FlexFueland can harm the vehicle's fuelsystem. Do not add anything toE85 or FlexFuel. Damage causedby additives would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.



Filling the Tank

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on thefuel pump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Do not use a cell phonewhile refueling.

. Do not re-enter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away fromthe fuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Fuel can spray out if the fuelcap is opened too quickly.This spray can happen if thetank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noiseto stop, then unscrew thecap all the way.

The fuel cap is behind a hinged fueldoor on the driver side of thevehicle.

If the vehicle has E85 fuel capability,the fuel cap will be yellow and statethat E85 or gasoline can be used.See E85 or FlexFuel 0 197.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise.

While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on thefuel door.

{ Warning

Overfilling the fuel tank by morethan three clicks of a standard fillnozzle may cause:

. Vehicle performance issues,including engine stalling anddamage to the fuel system.

. Fuel spills.

. Potential fuel fires.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care 0 290.



When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. Make surethe cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (Check EngineLight) 0 103.

{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Caution

If a new fuel cap is needed, besure to get the right type of capfrom your dealer. The wrong typeof fuel cap may not fit properly,

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

may cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to light, and coulddamage the fuel tank andemissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) 0 103.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. Always:

. Use approved fuelcontainers.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Remove the container fromthe vehicle, trunk, or pickupbed before filling.

. Place the container on theground.

. Place the nozzle inside thefill opening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, andkeep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

. Fill the container no morethan 95% full to allow forexpansion.

. Do not smoke, lightmatches, or use lighterswhile pumping fuel.

. Avoid using cell phones orother electronic devices.



Trailer Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer. Readthe entire section before towing atrailer.

For towing a disabled vehicle, seeTowing the Vehicle 0 287. Fortowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing 0 288.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Driving with a Trailer

When towing a trailer:

. Become familiar with the stateand local laws that apply totrailer towing.

. The trailer must be equippedwith brakes adequate for theintended use. A loaded trailerweighing more than 680 kg(1,500 lb) must be equipped withits own brake system, withbrakes working on all axles.Trailer braking equipmentconforming to CanadianStandards Association (CSA)requirement CAN3-D313, or itsequivalent, is recommended.

. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500 mi) to preventdamage to the engine, axle,or other parts.

. Then during the first 800 km(500 mi) of trailer towing, do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph) anddo not make starts at full throttle.

. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).The Tow/Haul Mode may beused if the transmission shiftstoo often. See Tow/Haul Mode0 184.

. Turn off Park Assist whentowing.

{ Warning

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear ofthe vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

When towing a trailer:

. Do not drive with theliftgate, trunk/hatch,or rear-most window open.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Also adjust the climatecontrol system to a settingthat brings in only outsideair. See “Climate ControlSystems” in the Index.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust 0 179.

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Thecombination you are driving is



longer and not as responsive as thevehicle itself. Get acquainted withthe handling and braking of the rigbefore setting out for the open road.

The structure, tires, and brakes ofthe trailer must be rated to carry theload. Inadequate trailer equipmentcan cause the combination tooperate in an unexpected or unsafemanner.

Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires, and mirrors. Get familiar withthe handling and braking of the rig.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid heavybraking and sudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Thecombination will not accelerate asquickly and is longer so it is

necessary to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle beforereturning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Caution

Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer tocome in contact with the vehicle.The vehicle could be damaged.Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do this sothe trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,

or other objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

If the trailer turn signal bulbs burnout, the arrows on the instrumentcluster will still flash for turns. It isimportant to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might get hot and no longerwork well.

Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shiftthe transmission to a lower gear ifthe transmission shifts too oftenunder heavy loads and/or hillyconditions.

The Tow/Haul Mode may be used ifthe transmission shifts too often.See Tow/Haul Mode 0 184.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, consider thefollowing: Engine coolant will boil at



a lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If the engine is turned offimmediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle may show signs similar toengine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run while parked,preferably on level ground, with thetransmission in P (Park) for a fewminutes before turning the engineoff. If the overheat warning comeson, see Engine Overheating 0 231.

Parking on Hills

{ Warning

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb iffacing downhill or into traffic iffacing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the regularbrakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake andshift into P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brakepedal.

2. Start the engine.

3. Shift into a gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Let up on the brake pedal.

6. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

7. Stop and have someone pickup and store the chocks.

Maintenance when TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 301.Things that are especially importantin trailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system, andbrake system. It is a good idea toinspect these before and duringthe trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Trailer TowingIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.



Caution

Pulling a trailer improperly candamage the vehicle and result incostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice in thissection and see your dealer forimportant information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity ofthe vehicle, read the information in“Weight of the Trailer” following.

Trailering is different than justdriving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking,durability, and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that ofyour passengers. So please readthis section carefully before pulling atrailer.

Weight of the Trailer

Safe trailering requires monitoringthe weight, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature, thedimensions of the front of the trailer,and how frequently the vehicle isused to pull a trailer are allimportant. Take into considerationany special equipment on thevehicle, and the amount of tongueweight the vehicle can carry. See“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” laterin this section.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment. Theweight of additional optionalequipment, passengers, and cargoin the tow vehicle must besubtracted from the maximum trailerweight.



Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.

Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR (a)

G2500 Cargo Van 2WD Short Wheelbase

4.3LV6 3.42 3 357 kg (7,400 lb) 5 897 kg (13,000 lb)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) 7 258 kg (16,000 lb)

G2500 Cargo Van 2WD Long Wheelbase

4.3LV6 3.42 3 220 kg (7,100 lb) 5 897 kg (13,000 lb)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) 7 258 kg (16,000 lb)

G2500 Passenger Van 2WD Short Wheelbase

4.3LV6 3.42 3 039 kg (6,700 lb) 5 897 kg (13,000 lb)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 355 kg (9,600 lb) 7 258 kg (16,000 lb)

G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Short Wheelbase

4.3LV6 3.42 3 357 kg (7,400 lb) 5 897 kg (13,000 lb)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) 7 258 kg (16,000 lb)

G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Long Wheelbase

4.3LV6 3.42 3 265 kg (7,200 lb) 5 897 kg (13,000 lb)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) 7 258 kg (16,000 lb)

G3500 Passenger Van 2WD Short Wheelbase

4.3LV6 3.42 3 039 kg (6,700 lb) 5 897 kg (13,000 lb)



Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR (a)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 355 kg (9,600 lb) 7 258 kg (16,000 lb)

G3500 Passenger Van 2WD Long Wheelbase

4.3LV6 3.42 2 858 kg (6,300 lb) 5 897 kg (13,000 lb)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 173 kg (9,200 lb) 7 258 kg (16,000 lb)

3500 Series Cutaway – 353 cm (139 in) Wheelbase

4.3LV6 3.42/3.73 (b) 5 897 kg (13,000 lb)

6.0LV8 3.42/3.73 (b) 7 258 kg (16,000 lb)


4.3LV6 3.42/3.73 (b) 5 897 kg (13,000 lb)

6.0LV8 3.42/3.73 (b) 7 258 kg (16,000 lb)

6.0LV8 4.10 (b) 8 618 kg (19,000 lb)

6.0LV8 4.10 (b) 9 072 kg (20,000 lb)


6.0LV8 3.42/3.73 (b) 7 258 kg (16,000 lb)

6.0LV8 4.10 (b) 8 618 kg (19,000 lb)

6.0LV8 4.10 (b) 9 072 kg (20,000 lb)

(a) The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversion. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.(b) Maximum Trailer Weight cannot be provided because total vehicle weight is unknown.



Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (1) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers, or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 167 for moreinformation about the vehicle'smaximum load capacity.

In general, trailer tongue weight (1)should be 10–15% of the totalloaded trailer weight (2). Somespecific trailer types, such as boattrailers, fall outside of this range.Refer to the trailer owner’s manualfor the recommended trailer tongueweight. In all cases, do not exceedthe maximum loads for the vehicleseries and hitch type.

Do not exceed the maximumallowable tongue weight for thevehicle. Choose the shortest hitchextension that will position the hitchball closest to the vehicle. This willhelp reduce the effect of trailertongue weight on the rear axle.

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) orthe RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating). The effect ofadditional weight may reduce thetrailering capacity more than thetotal of the additional weight.

It is important that the vehicle doesnot exceed any of its ratings —GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, MaximumTrailer Rating, or Tongue Weight.The only way to be sure it is notexceeding any of these ratings is toweigh the vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle tires are inflatedto the upper limit for cold tires.These numbers can be found on the



Certification label at the rear edge ofthe driver door, or see Vehicle LoadLimits 0 167. Make sure not to goover the GVW limit for the vehicle,or the GAWR, including the weightof the trailer tongue. If using aweight distributing hitch, make surenot to go over the rear axle limitbefore applying the weightdistribution spring bars.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

The correct hitch equipment helpsmaintain combination control. Manytrailers can be towed with aweight-carrying hitch which simplyfeatures a coupler latched to thehitch ball, or a tow eye latched to apintle hook. Other trailers mayrequire a weight-distributing hitchthat uses spring bars to distributethe trailer tongue weight among thetwo vehicle and trailer axles. See“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” underTrailer Towing 0 202 for rating limitswith various hitch types.

Consider using sway controls withany trailer. Ask a traileringprofessional about sway controls orrefer to the trailer manufacturer'srecommendations and instructions.

Weight-Distributing Hitchesand Weight Carrying Hitches

A weight distributing hitch may beuseful with some trailers.

1. Front of Vehicle2. Body to Ground Distance

When using a weight-distributinghitch, the hitch must be adjusted sothe distance (2) remains the sameboth before and after coupling thetrailer to the tow vehicle.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Always leave just enough slack sothe rig can turn. Never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 680 kg (1,500 lb) must beequipped with its own brake system,with brakes working on all axles.Trailer braking equipmentconforming to Canadian StandardsAssociation (CSA) requirementCAN3-D313, or its equivalent, isrecommended.



State and local regulations may alsorequire the trailer to have its ownbraking system if loaded above acertain threshold. Theserequirements vary from state tostate.

Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for the trailer brakes sothey are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

Do not tap into the vehicle'shydraulic brake system.

Trailer Wiring Harness

The optional heavy-duty trailerwiring package includes a wiringharness, with a seven-pin connectorat the rear of the vehicle and afour-wire harness assembly underthe driver side of the instrumentpanel. The four-wire harnessassembly comes without aconnector.

If the vehicle does not have a trailerhitch, the seven-wire harnessassembly with connector is tapedtogether and located in a framepocket at the driver side rear leftcorner of the frame.

If the vehicle has a trailer hitch, theseven-wire harness assembly withconnector is attached to a bracketon the hitch platform. In both cases,the seven-wire harness has aconnector and includes a 30-ampfeed wire.

Use only a round, seven-wireconnector with flat blade terminalsmeeting SAE J2863 specificationsfor proper electrical connectivity.

The seven-wire harness connectorcontains the following trailer circuits:

. Light Green: Back-up Lamps(10A fuse)**

. White: Ground

. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal

. Dark Green: Right Rear Stopand Turn Signal*

. Red/Black Stripe: Battery Feed(30A Fuse)

. Brown: Trailer Park LampSupply Voltage (15A fuse)**

. Yellow: Left Rear Stop and TurnSignal *

The four-wire harness (withoutconnector) contains the followingcircuits:

. Black: Ground

. Red/White: Battery Feed

. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal

. Light Blue: CHMSL/StoplampSupply Voltage

* If the vehicle is a cutaway withtrailer provisions, a 15 amp fuse willbe shared for both left/stop trailerturn and right/stop trailer turnsignals. However, the cutawaylighting connector will have a10 amp fuse for each signal.

** If the vehicle is a cutaway withtrailer provisions, a 15 amp fuse willbe shared for trailer park lamps andcutaway rear lighting connector parklamps. Also, a 10 amp fuse will beshared for trailer back-up lamps andcutaway rear lighting connectorback-up lamps.



Tow/Haul Mode

This button is on the instrumentpanel, to the right of the steeringwheel.

Pressing this button turns on and offthe Tow/Haul Mode.

This indicator light on the instrumentcluster comes on when the Tow/Haul Mode is on.

Tow/Haul is a feature that assistswhen pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load. See Tow/HaulMode 0 184.

Tow/Haul is designed to be mosteffective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least75 percent of the vehicle GrossCombined Weight Rating (GCWR).

See “Weight of the Trailer” in TrailerTowing 0 202. Tow/Haul is mostuseful under the following drivingconditions:

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load throughrolling terrain.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load instop-and-go traffic.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in busyparking lots where improved lowspeed control of the vehicle isdesired.

Operating the vehicle in Tow/HaulMode when lightly loaded or with notrailer at all will not cause damage.However, there is no benefit to theselection of Tow/Haul when thevehicle is unloaded. Such aselection when unloaded may resultin unpleasant engine andtransmission driving characteristicsand reduced fuel economy. Tow/Haul is recommended only whenpulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load.

Trailer SwayControl (TSC)Trailer sway is unintendedside-to-side motion of a trailer whilebeing towed. If the vehicle is towinga trailer and the TSC detects thatsway is increasing, the vehiclebrakes are selectively applied ateach wheel, to help reduceexcessive trailer sway.

When TSC is active, the TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrakwarning light will flash on theinstrument cluster. Vehicle speedmust be reduced. If trailer swaycontinues, StabiliTrak can reduceengine torque to help slow thevehicle. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 186.

{ Warning

Even if the vehicle is equippedwith TSC, trailer sway could resultin loss of control and the vehiclecould crash. If excessive trailersway is detected, slow down to a

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

safe speed. Check the trailer andvehicle to help correct possiblecauses. These could include animproperly or overloaded trailer,unrestrained cargo, impropertrailer hitch configuration,excessive vehicle-trailer speed,or improperly inflated or incorrectvehicle or trailer tires. See TowingEquipment 0 207 for trailer ratingsand hitch setuprecommendations.

Adding non-dealer accessories canaffect the vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 213.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Warning

The Data Link Connector (DLC) isused for vehicle serviceand Emission Inspection/Maintenance testing. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) 0 103.A device connected to the DLC —such as an aftermarket fleet ordriver-behavior tracking device —may interfere with vehiclesystems. This could affect vehicleoperation and cause a crash.Such devices may also accessinformation stored in the vehicle’ssystems.

Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work andwould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Always checkwith your dealer before addingelectrical equipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle 0 66 and Adding Equipmentto the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle0 66.


Vehicle Care 211

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 212California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . . 213

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 220Automatic Transmission Fluid(6-Speed Transmission) . . . . . 221

Automatic Transmission Fluid(8-Speed Transmission) . . . . . 224

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . 225Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . 231Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . 233Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Battery - North America . . . . . . 236Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Noise Control System . . . . . . . . 238Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 239Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 240

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 240Windshield Replacement . . . . . 241Gas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,and Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . 243

Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . 245

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 245

Electrical SystemElectrical System Overload . . . 246Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 246Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Floor Console Fuse Block . . . . 251

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . 254Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Dual Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . 268When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271


212 Vehicle Care

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 273Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 283

Jump StartingJump Starting - NorthAmerica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 287Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 Warning

{ Warning

Most motor vehicles, includingthis one, as well as many of itsservice parts and fluids, containand/or emit chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts andsystems, many fluids, and somecomponent wear by-productscontain and/or emit thesechemicals. For more informationgo to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See Battery - North America 0 236and Jump Starting - North America0 284 and the back cover.


Vehicle Care 213

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non-dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to suspension componentscaused by modifying vehicle heightoutside of factory settings will not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non-GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 66.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner’s manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information0 325.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 66.


214 Vehicle Care

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records 0 311.

Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the handle with this symbolon it. It is in front of the driverside door frame near the floor.

2. Go to the front of the vehicleand lift up the secondary hoodrelease, which is underneaththe middle of the hood.

3. Lift the hood, release the hoodprop from its retainer, and putthe hood prop into the slot inthe hood.

If the vehicle has an underhoodlamp, it will automatically come onand stay on until the hood is closed.

Before closing the hood, be sure allof the filler caps are on properly.Then lift the hood to relievepressure on the hood prop. Removethe hood prop from the slot in thehood and return the prop to itsretainer. Let the hood down andclose it firmly.


Vehicle Care 215

Engine Compartment Overview

4.3L V6 Engine


216 Vehicle Care

1. Battery - North America 0 236.

2. Radiator Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System 0 226.

3. Coolant Recovery Tank. SeeCooling System 0 226.

4. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System0 226.

5. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 225.

6. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 218.

7. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 218.

8. Power Steering FluidReservoir. See Power SteeringFluid 0 233.

9. Engine Compartment FuseBlock 0 247.

10. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See Brake Fluid0 235.

11. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid0 233.


Vehicle Care 217

6.0L V8 Engine


218 Vehicle Care

1. Battery - North America 0 236.

2. Radiator Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System 0 226.

3. Coolant Recovery Tank. SeeCooling System 0 226.

4. Automatic Transmission FluidDipstick. See “Checking theFluid Level” under AutomaticTransmission Fluid (6-SpeedTransmission) 0 221 orAutomatic Transmission Fluid(8-Speed Transmission) 0 224.

5. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 218.

6. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 218.

7. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System0 226.

8. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 225.

9. Power Steering FluidReservoir. See Power SteeringFluid 0 233.

10. Engine Compartment FuseBlock 0 247.

11. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See Brake Fluid0 235.

12. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid0 233.

Engine OilFor diesel engine vehicles, see“Engine Oil” in the Duramax dieselsupplement.

To ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:

. Use engine oil approved to theproper specification and of theproper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System 0 220.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

Check the engine oil level regularly,every 650 km (400 mi), especiallyprior to a long trip. The engine oildipstick handle is a loop. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 215 for the location.

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.


Vehicle Care 219

If a low oil Driver Information Center(DIC) message displays, check theoil level.

Follow these guidelines:

. To get an accurate reading, parkthe vehicle on level ground.Check the engine oil level afterthe engine has been off for atleast two hours. Checking theengine oil level on steep gradesor too soon after engine shutoffcan result in incorrect readings.Accuracy improves whenchecking a cold engine prior tostarting. Remove the dipstickand check the level.

. If unable to wait two hours, theengine must be off for at least15 minutes if the engine iswarm, or at least 30 minutes ifthe engine is not warm. Pull outthe dipstick, wipe it with a cleanpaper towel or cloth, then push itback in all the way. Remove itagain, keeping the tip down, andcheck the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

4.3L V6 Engine

6.0L V8 Engine

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick andthe engine has been off for at least15 minutes, add 1 L (1 qt) of therecommended oil and then recheckthe level. See “Selecting the RightEngine Oil” later in this section foran explanation of what kind of oil touse. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities andSpecifications 0 313.

Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oillevels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overview0 215 for the location of the engineoil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.


220 Vehicle Care

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 308.

Specification

Ask for and use engine oils thatmeet the dexos1 specification.Engine oils that have beenapproved by GM as meeting thedexos1 specification are markedwith the dexos1 approved logo. Seewww.gmdexos.com.

Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil or equivalent can resultin engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Viscosity Grade

Use SAE 5W-30 viscosity gradeengine oil.

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29 °C(−20 °F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may beused. An oil of this viscosity gradewill provide easier cold starting forthe engine at extremely lowtemperatures. When selecting an oilof the appropriate viscosity grade, itis recommended to select an oil ofthe correct specification. See“Specification” earlier in this section.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils meeting thedexos1 specification are all that isneeded for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors which


Vehicle Care 221

include engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an engine oilchange is indicated can varyconsiderably. For the oil life systemto work properly, the system mustbe reset every time the oil ischanged.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change.

To reset the Engine Oil Life Systemon most models:


2. Press and hold V on the DICwhile the Oil Life display isactive. The oil life will changeto 100%.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:


2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds. If thedisplay shows 100%, thesystem is reset.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not reset. Repeat theprocedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid (6-SpeedTransmission)

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

It is usually not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level. The onlyreason for fluid loss is atransmission leak or overheatedtransmission. If a small leak is


222 Vehicle Care

suspected, use the followingprocedures to check the fluid level.However, if there is a large leak, itmay be necessary to have thevehicle towed to a dealer and haveit repaired before driving the vehiclefurther.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule 0 301, and be sure to usethe transmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 308.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Because this operation can bedifficult, it is recommended to havethis check done at your dealer,which can monitor the transmissiontemperature. The transmission fluidlevel increases with temperature. Toobtain a highly accurate fluid levelcheck, the transmission temperaturemust be measured.

If it is decided to check the fluidlevel, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or a false readingon the dipstick may occur.

Caution

Too much or too little fluid candamage the transmission. Toomuch can mean that some of thefluid could come out and fall onhot engine parts or exhaustsystem parts, starting a fire. Toolittle fluid could cause thetransmission to overheat. Be sureto get an accurate reading ifchecking the transmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes with theengine off, before checking thetransmission fluid level if the vehiclehas been driven:

. In hot weather, when outsidetemperatures are above 32 °C(90 °F).

. The vehicle is heavily loaded.

. At high speed for quite a while inhot weather.

. In heavy traffic and hot weather.

. While pulling a trailer.

After driving under these conditions,a hot check can be performed. Thefluid should be hot, which is 71 °C to93 °C (160 °F to 200 °F).

A cold fluid level check can beperformed after the vehicle hasbeen sitting for eight hours or morewith the engine off, but this is usedonly as a reference. Let the enginerun at idle for five minutes if theoutside temperature is between15 °C to 32 °C (60 °F to 90 °F).Should the fluid level be low duringthis cold check, the fluid must bechecked warm or hot before addingfluid. If the outside temperature iscolder than 15 °C (60 °F) or hotterthan 32 °C (90 °F), a cold checkcannot be performed.

A warm fluid level check can beperformed by driving the vehicleunder lightly loaded conditions andoutside temperatures between 10 °Cto 27 °C (50 °F to 80 °F). Thevehicle should be driven for at least24 km (15 mi) before performing awarm check. Checking the fluid


Vehicle Care 223

warm or hot will give a moreaccurate reading of the fluid levelthan a cold check.

Because the vehicle is equippedwith a high-efficiency air-to-oilcooler, the transmission fluidtemperature may not reach therequired hot fluid level checkingtemperature under normal lightlyloaded driving vehicle conditions.

Checking the Fluid Level

Prepare the vehicle:

1. Park the vehicle on a levelplace. Keep the enginerunning.

2. With the parking brake applied,place the shift lever in P (Park).

3. With a foot on the brake pedal,move the shift lever througheach gear range, pausing forabout three seconds in eachrange. When M is reached,move the selector from M1through M3. Then, position theshift lever in P (Park).

4. Let the engine run at idle fortwo minutes or more.

Then, without shutting off theengine, use the steps that follow.

The transmission dipstick is nearthe center of the enginecompartment and will be labeledwith the graphic shown.

See Engine Compartment Overview0 215 for more information onlocation.

1. COLD Range2. WARM Range3. HOT Range

1. Flip the handle up, pull out thedipstick, and wipe it with aclean rag or paper towel.

2. Push it back in all the way, waitthree seconds, and pull it backout again.

3. Check both sides of thedipstick, and read the lowerlevel. The fluid level must be inthe COLD (1) range for a coldcheck, transmissiontemperature 27 °C to 32 °C(80 °F to 90 °F); between theCOLD (1) and HOT (3) rangefor a WARM (2) check, 50 °C to60 °C (122 °F to 140 °F); or inthe HOT (3) cross-hatchedrange for a hot check, 71 °C to93 °C (160 °F to 200 °F). Besure to keep the dipstickpointed down to get anaccurate reading.

4. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way;then flip the handle down tolock the dipstick in place.


224 Vehicle Care

How to Add AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 308 to determine whatkind of transmission fluid to use.

1. WARM Range2. HOT Range

Using a funnel, add fluid down thetransmission dipstick tube only afterchecking the transmission fluidwhile it is warm or hot. A cold checkis used only as a reference. If thefluid level is low, add only enough ofthe proper fluid to bring the level upto the middle of the WARM (1) orHOT (2) range depending on theambient temperature and priordriving conditions. Refer to “How toCheck Automatic TransmissionFluid” earlier in this section forinstructions on driving to achieve

warm or hot transmission fluid.It does not take much fluid,generally less than 0.5 L (1 pt). Donot overfill.

Caution

Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damagethe vehicle, and the damage maynot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use theautomatic transmission fluid listedin Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 308.

. After adding fluid, recheck thefluid level as described under“How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid,” earlier inthis section.

. When the correct fluid level isobtained, push the dipstick backin all the way; then flip thehandle down to lock the dipstickin place.

Automatic TransmissionFluid (8-SpeedTransmission)

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

It is usually not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level. The onlyreason for fluid loss is atransmission leak or overheatedtransmission. This vehicle is notequipped with a transmission fluidlevel dipstick. There is a specialprocedure for checking andchanging the transmission fluid inthese vehicles. Because thisprocedure is difficult, this should bedone at the dealer. Contact thedealer for additional information orthe procedure can be found in theservice manual. See ServicePublications Ordering Information0 325.


Vehicle Care 225

Caution

Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damagethe vehicle, and the damage maynot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use theautomatic transmission fluid listedin Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 308.

Change the fluid and filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalslisted in Maintenance Schedule0 301. Be sure to use thetransmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 308.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe air cleaner/filter assembly is onthe front of the engine compartmenton the driver side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overview0 215.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

For intervals on changing andinspecting the engine air filter, seeMaintenance Schedule 0 301.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Do not start the engine or have theengine running with the engine airfilter housing open. Before removingthe engine air filter, make sure thatthe engine air filter housing andnearby components are free of dirtand debris. Remove the engine airfilter. Lightly tap and shake theengine air filter (away from thevehicle) to release dust and dirt.Inspect the engine air filter fordamage, and replace if damaged.Do not clean the engine air filter orcomponents with water orcompressed air.

4.3L V6 Engine

To inspect and replace the filter:

1. Remove the eight screws, slidethe top cover forward and lift,to gain access to the aircleaner/filter.

2. Remove the air cleaner/filterfrom the housing base. Takecare to dislodge as little dirt aspossible.

3. Clean the air cleaner/filtersealing surface andhousing base.

4. Install the engine air cleaner/filter in the housing base.


226 Vehicle Care

5. Install the top cover by sliding itinto position on the housingbase, and secure using eightscrews.

6.0L V8 Engine

1. Retaining Clips2. Housing Base3. Housing Cover

To inspect and replace the filter:

1. Unlock the two retainingclips (1) on the sides of thehousing cover (3) and on thehousing base (2) and pull thecover off.

2. Remove the air cleaner/filterfrom the housing base. Takecare to dislodge as little dirt aspossible.

3. Clean the air cleaner/filtersealing surface andhousing base.

4. Install the engine air cleaner/filter by aligning the arrow onone side of the air cleaner/filterend cap with the arrow on topof the housing base.

5. Install the housing cover byaligning the arrow on top of thecover to the arrow on top of thehousing base, and fasten thetwo retaining clips.

See Maintenance Schedule 0 301 todetermine when to replace theengine air cleaner/filter.

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The air

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

cleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Alwayshave the air cleaner/filter in placewhen driving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.


Vehicle Care 227

4.3L V6 Engine

1. Radiator Pressure Cap2. Coolant Recovery Tank3. Engine Cooling Fan (Out

of View)

6.0L V8 Engine

1. Radiator Pressure Cap2. Coolant Recovery Tank3. Engine Cooling Fan (Out

of View)

{ Warning

An underhood electric fan canstart up even when the engine isnot running and can cause injury.Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhoodelectric fan.

{ Warning

Do not touch heater or radiatorhoses, or other engine parts.They can be very hot and canburn you. Do not run the engine ifthere is a leak; all coolant couldleak out. That could cause anengine fire and can burn you. Fixany leak before driving thevehicle.

Engine Coolant

The cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating 0 231.


228 Vehicle Care

What to Use

{ Warning

Plain water, or other liquids suchas alcohol, can boil before theproper coolant mixture will. Withplain water or the wrong mixture,the engine could get too hot butthere would not be an overheatwarning. The engine could catchfire and you or others could beburned.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:

. Gives freezing protection downto −37 °C (−34 °F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129 °C (265 °F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Caution

Do not use anything other than amix of DEX-COOL coolant thatmeets GM StandardGMW3420 and clean, drinkablewater. Anything else can causedamage to the engine coolingsystem and the vehicle, whichwould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant recovery tank. If thecoolant inside the coolant recoverytank is boiling, do not do anythingelse until it cools down. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is not ator above the indicated mark, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant recovery tank, but be surethe cooling system is cool beforethis is done.

The coolant recovery tank cap hasthis symbol on it.


Vehicle Care 229

When the engine is cold, the coolantlevel should be at or above theCOLD FILL mark. If it is not, therecould be a leak in the coolingsystem.

If the coolant is low, add the coolantor take the vehicle to a dealer forservice.

How to Add Coolant to theRecovery Tank for GasolineEngines

{ Warning

Spilling coolant on hot engineparts can burn you. Coolantcontains ethylene glycol and it willburn if the engine parts are hotenough.

{ Warning

Plain water, or other liquids suchas alcohol, can boil before theproper coolant mixture will. Withplain water or the wrong mixture,the engine could get too hot butthere would not be an overheatwarning. The engine could catchfire and you or others could beburned.

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system are underpressure. Turning the pressurecap, even a little, can cause themto come out at high speed andyou could be burned. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andpressure cap to cool.

Caution

Failure to follow the specificcoolant fill procedure could causethe engine to overheat and couldcause system damage. If coolantis not visible in the surge tank,contact your dealer.

If coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture at thecoolant recovery tank.


230 Vehicle Care

How to Add Coolant to theRadiator

{ Warning


If coolant is needed, add the propermixture directly to the radiator, butbe sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done.

1. Remove the radiator pressurecap when the cooling system,including the radiator pressurecap and upper radiator hose, isno longer hot. Turn thepressure cap slowlycounterclockwise until it firststops. Do not press down whileturning the pressure cap.

If a hiss is heard, wait for thatto stop. A hiss means there isstill some pressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure cap,but now push down as you turnit. Remove the pressure cap.

3. Fill the radiator with the propermixture, up to the base of thefiller neck. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 308 formore information about theproper coolant mixture.

4. Remove the coolant recoverytank cap and fill to the COLDFILL mark.

5. Reinstall the cap back on thecoolant recovery tank, butleave the radiator pressurecap off.

6. Start the engine and let it rununtil the upper radiator hosecan be felt getting hot. Watchout for the engine cooling fan.

7. By this time, the coolant levelinside the radiator filler neckmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the proper


Vehicle Care 231

mixture through the filler neckuntil the level reaches the baseof the filler neck.

8. Replace the pressure cap. Atany time during this procedureif coolant begins to flow out ofthe filler neck, reinstall thepressure cap.

Caution

If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and enginedamage may occur. Be sure thecap is properly and tightlysecured.

Engine OverheatingIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

Caution

Do not run the engine if there is aleak in the engine cooling system.This can cause a loss of allcoolant and can damage thesystem and vehicle. Have anyleaks fixed right away.

The vehicle has an indicator to warnof engine overheating.

There is an engine coolanttemperature gauge on the vehicle'sinstrument cluster. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge 0 100.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,but instead get service help rightaway, see Roadside AssistanceProgram 0 320.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, the fan

should be running. If it is not, do notcontinue to run the engine and havethe vehicle serviced.

See if the engine cooling fan speedincreases when idle speed isdoubled by pushing the acceleratorpedal down. If it does not, thevehicle needs service. Turn off theengine.

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ Warning



232 Vehicle Care

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:

. Climbs a long hill on a hot day

. Stops after high-speed driving

. Idles for long periods in traffic

. Tows a trailer.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to thehighest temperature and to thehighest fan speed. Open thewindows as necessary.

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

If the engine coolant temperaturegauge is no longer in the overheatzone or an overheat warning nolonger displays, the vehicle can bedriven. Continue to drive the vehicleslowly for about 10 minutes. Keep asafe vehicle distance from thevehicle in front. If the warning doesnot come back on, continue to drivenormally and have the coolingsystem checked for proper fill andfunction.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam,push down the accelerator until theengine speed is about twice as fastas normal idle speed for at leastthree minutes while parked. If thewarning is still on, turn off theengine until it cools down.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood, get service help right away.

Engine FanThe vehicle has a clutched enginecooling fan. When the clutch isengaged, the fan spins faster toprovide more air to cool the engine.In most everyday driving conditions,the fan is spinning slower and theclutch is not fully engaged. Thisimproves fuel economy and reducesfan noise. Under heavy vehicleloading, trailer towing, and/or highoutside temperatures, the fan speedincreases as the clutch more fullyengages, so an increase in fannoise may be heard. This is normaland should not be mistaken as thetransmission slipping or makingextra shifts. It is merely the coolingsystem functioning properly. The fanwill slow down when additionalcooling is not required and theclutch partially disengages.

This fan noise may be heard whenstarting the engine. It will go awayas the fan clutch partiallydisengages.


Vehicle Care 233

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluid reservoir isin the engine compartment on thedriver side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 215 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessthere is a leak suspected in thesystem or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartmentcool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

4. Replace the cap andcompletely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again andlook at the fluid level on thedipstick.

The level should be at the COLDFILL mark. If necessary, add onlyenough fluid to bring the level up tothe mark.

To prevent contamination of brakefluid, never check or fill the powersteering reservoir with the brakemaster cylinder cover off.

What to Use

Caution

Use of the incorrect fluid maydamage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always usethe correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 308.

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 308. Always use theproper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks anddamage hoses and seals.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When the vehicle needs windshieldwasher fluid, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fall


234 Vehicle Care

below freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 215 forreservoir location.

Caution

. Do not use washer fluid thatcontains any type of waterrepellent coating. This cancause the wiper blades tochatter or skip.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in thewindshield washer. It candamage the windshieldwasher system and paint.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause thesolution to freeze anddamage the washer fluidtank and other parts of thewasher system.

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Fill the washer fluid tankonly three-quarters full whenit is very cold. This allowsfor fluid expansion iffreezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it iscompletely full.

BrakesDisc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or canbe heard all the time when thevehicle is moving, except whenapplying the brake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.


Vehicle Care 235

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 313.

Brake pads should be replaced ascomplete sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service may be required.

Replacing Brake System Parts

Always replace brake system partswith new, approved replacementparts. If this is not done, the brakesmay not work properly. The brakingperformance expected can change

in many other ways if the wrongreplacement brake parts areinstalled or if parts are improperlyinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 215 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoir maygo down:

. Normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are installed, thefluid level goes back up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system. Have thebrake hydraulic system fixed.With a leak, the brakes will notwork well.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove fluid, asnecessary, only when work is doneon the brake hydraulic system.

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.


236 Vehicle Care

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight 0 105.

Brake fluid absorbs water over time.Replace brake fluid at the specifiedintervals to prevent increasedstopping distance. See MaintenanceSchedule 0 301.

Checking Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid by looking at thebrake fluid reservoir. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 215.

The fluid level should be aboveMIN. If it is not, have the brakehydraulic system checked to see ifthere is a leak.

After work is done on the brakehydraulic system, make sure thelevel is above MIN but not over theMAX mark.

What to Add

Use only GM approved DOT 3brake fluid from a clean, sealedcontainer. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 308.

{ Warning

The wrong or contaminated brakefluid could result in damage to thebrake system. This could result inthe loss of braking leading to apossible injury. Always use theproper GM approved brake fluid.

Caution

If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces, thepaint finish can be damaged.Immediately wash off any paintedsurface.

Battery - North AmericaThe original equipment battery ismaintenance free. Do not removethe cap and do not add fluid.

Refer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 215 for battery location.

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known tothe State of California to cause

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 237

Warning (Continued)

cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Batteries alsocontain other chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer. WASH HANDS AFTERHANDLING. For more informationgo to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See California Proposition65 Warning 0 212 and the backcover.

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting -North America 0 284 for tips onworking around a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Rear Axle

When to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck rear axle fluid unless yoususpect there is a leak or you hearan unusual noise. A fluid loss couldindicate a problem. Have itinspected and repaired.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

For axles with the fill plug locatedon the back cover of the rear axle,the proper level is 15 mm to 40 mm(0.59 to 1.57 in) below the bottom ofthe fill hole.


238 Vehicle Care

For axles with the fill plug locatedon the passenger side of the rearaxle, the proper level is 0 mm to10 mm (0 to 0.4 in) below the bottomof the fill hole.

What to Use

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 308 to determine whatkind of lubricant to use.

Noise Control System

Noise Emissions Warranty

General Motors warrants to the firstperson who purchases this vehiclefor purposes other than resale and

to each subsequent purchaser thatthis vehicle as manufactured byGeneral Motors, was designed, builtand equipped to conform at the timeit left General Motors’s control withall applicable U.S. EPA NoiseControl Regulations. This warrantycovers this vehicle as designed,built and equipped by GeneralMotors, and is not limited to anyparticular part, component orsystem of the vehicle manufacturedby General Motors. Defects indesign, assembly or in any part,component or system of the vehicleas manufactured by GeneralMotors, which, at the time it leftGeneral Motors’s control, causednoise emissions to exceed Federalstandards, are covered by thiswarranty for the life of the vehicle.

The following information relates tocompliance with federal noiseemission standards for vehicles witha Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) of more than 4 536 kg(10,000 lb). The MaintenanceSchedule provides information onmaintaining the noise control systemto minimize degradation of the noise

emission control system during thelife of the vehicle. The noise controlsystem warranty is given in thewarranty manual.

These standards apply only tovehicles sold in the United States.

TAMPERING WITH NOISECONTROL SYSTEMPROHIBITED

Federal law prohibits the followingacts or the causing thereof:

1. The removal or renderinginoperative by any person,other than for purposes ofmaintenance, repair,or replacement, of any deviceor element of designincorporated into any newvehicle for the purpose of noisecontrol prior to its sale ordelivery to the ultimatepurchaser or while it is inuse; or


Vehicle Care 239

2. The use of the vehicle aftersuch device or element ofdesign has been removed orrendered inoperative by anyperson.

Among those acts presumed toconstitute tampering are the actslisted below.

Insulation:

Removal of the noise shields or anyunderhood insulation.

Engine:

Removal or rendering the enginespeed governor, if equipped,inoperative so as to allow enginespeed to exceed manufacturerspecifications.

Fan and Drive:

. Removal of the fan clutch,if equipped, or rendering theclutch inoperative.

. Removal of the fan shroud,if equipped.

Air Intake:

. Removal of the air cleanersilencer.

. Modification of the air cleaner.

Exhaust:

. Removal of the muffler and/orresonator.

. Removal of the exhaust pipesand exhaust pipe clamps.

Fuel Operated Heater (FOH) -Diesel Engine:

. Removal of the muffler.

Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Apply both the parking brakeand the regular brake.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.


240 Vehicle Care

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Apply the parking brake. Beready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition offin each shift lever position.

. The ignition should turn to offonly when the shift lever is inP (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only when the ignition is off.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.

. To check the parking brake'sholding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove foot

pressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear and cracking.See Maintenance Schedule 0 301.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For proper type andlength, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts 0 310.


Vehicle Care 241

Caution

Allowing the wiper arm to touchthe windshield when no wiperblade is installed could damagethe windshield. Any damage thatoccurs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not allowthe wiper arm to touch thewindshield.

1. Lift the wiper arm away fromthe windshield.

2. Push the release lever (2) todisengage the hook and pushthe wiper arm (1) out of theblade assembly (3).

3. Push the new blade assemblysecurely on the wiper arm untilthe release lever clicks intoplace.

Windshield Replacement

Driver Assistance Systems

If the windshield needs to bereplaced and the vehicle isequipped with a front camera sensorfor the Driver Assistance Systems, aGM replacement windshield isrecommended. The replacementwindshield must be installedaccording to GM specifications forproper alignment. If it is not, thesesystems may not work properly, theymay display messages, or they maynot work at all. See your dealer forproper windshield replacement.

Gas Strut(s)This vehicle is equipped with gasstrut(s) to provide assistance inlifting and holding open the hood/trunk/liftgate system in full openposition.

{ Warning

If the gas struts that hold openthe hood, trunk, and/or liftgate fail,you or others could be seriouslyinjured. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service immediately.Visually inspect the gas struts forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage periodically. Check tomake sure the hood/trunk/liftgateis held open with enough force.If struts are failing to hold thehood/trunk/liftgate, do notoperate. Have the vehicleserviced.

Caution

Do not apply tape or hang anyobjects from gas struts. Also donot push down or pull on gasstruts. This may cause damage tothe vehicle.

See Maintenance Schedule 0 301.


242 Vehicle Care

Hood

Trunk

Liftgate

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.


Vehicle Care 243

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, or any bulb changingprocedure not listed in this section,contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ Warning

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

Front Turn Signal,Sidemarker, and ParkingLamps

1. Front Parking and TurnSignal Lamp

2. Front Sidemarker Lamp

To replace the front turn signal,sidemarker, and/or parking lampbulb(s):

1. Use a small tool to unlatch theoutboard clip on the lamp bypushing inboard and prying thelamp assembly forward.

2. Remove the lamp from thegrille.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise one-quarterturn and remove it from thelamp assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from thesocket by pulling it straight out.

5. Replace the bulb.

6. Turn the bulb socket clockwiseto reinstall it in the lampassembly.

7. Reinstall the lamp assemblyinto the grille until the outboardclip snaps into place.

TaillampsTo replace a taillamp/turn signallamp or back-up lamp bulb:


244 Vehicle Care

1. Remove the two inboard nutsfrom the inside of the taillampassembly.

2. The third nut (3) is under theapplique piece (2) above thelamp. Remove the two inboardapplique nuts. Pull theapplique (2) straight rearwardslightly to clear the studs. Thenrotate the applique (2) just farenough to gain access to theouter push pins (1).

3. Carefully disconnect the pushpins (1) from the appliquebracket.

4. Remove the third nut (3) fromthe upper outboard side ofthe lamp.

5. Remove the taillamp assemblyfrom the vehicle.

6. Remove the taillamp/turn signallamp (1) or back-up lamp (2)bulb socket by turning itcounterclockwise one-quarterturn and pulling it out of thelamp assembly.

7. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out.

8. Push the new bulb into thesocket.

9. Reinstall the bulb socket byturning it clockwise into thelamp assembly.

10. Reverse Steps 1–5 to reinstallthe taillamp assembly andapplique.


Vehicle Care 245

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)The Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) is above the rear doors atthe center of the vehicle.

To replace a bulb:

1. Remove the two screws fromthe CHMSL assembly.

2. Remove the CHMSL assembly.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise one-quarterturn to remove it from the lampassembly.

4. Pull the old bulb straight out ofthe socket and push the newbulb into the socket.

5. Turn the bulb socket clockwiseone-quarter turn to install it inthe lamp assembly.

6. Reinstall the CHMSL assemblyand two screws.

Do not block or damage the CHMSLwhen items are loaded on the roofof the vehicle.

License Plate Lamp

1. Bulb Socket

2. License Plate BulbAssembly

3. Screws

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the screws (3) thatsecure the license plate bulbassembly (2).

2. Turn the bulb socket (1)counterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the socket.

3. Install the new bulb.

4. Reverse Steps 1 and 2 toreinstall the license plate bulbassembly.


246 Vehicle Care

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of fires caused by electricalproblems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.


Vehicle Care 247

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThe fuse block is located in theengine compartment on the driverside of the vehicle.

Vehicles with upfitter content

See www.gmupfitter.com for upfitterprovisions and best practices.

Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep thecovers on any electricalcomponent.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

1 ABS motor

2 ABS module


248 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

3 Right trailerstoplamp/Turnlamp

4 –

5 –

6 Fuel system controlmodule/Ignition

7 Body controlmodule 5



10 Instrument cluster

11 Trailer wiring

12 –

13 Interior rear visioncamera module

14 Windshield washer

Fuses Usage

16 Horn

17 Transmission

18 A/C

19 Engine controlmodule battery

20 Cutaway/Leftstoplamp/Turnlamp

21 Left trailerstoplamp/Turnlamp

22 Cutaway/Rightstoplamp/Turnlamp

23 –

24 Fuel pump

25 Auxiliary poweroutlet


27 Special equipmentoption

Fuses Usage

28 Airbag

29 Steering wheelsensor

30 Engine controlmodule Ignition

31 Transmissioncontrol moduleIgnition

32 Transmissioncontrol module 1battery/Enginecontrol modulebattery power (gas6 cyl)

33 Rear parking aidmodule

34 –

35 –

36 Fuel system controlmodule battery


Vehicle Care 249

Fuses Usage

41 Transmissioncontrol 2 modulebattery power

42 Trailer wiring

43 –

44 Starter solenoid

45 Engine controlmodule/Powertrain

46 AC DC inverter

47 Cooling fan – low

51 Left high-beamheadlamp

52 Right high-beamheadlamp

53 Left low-beamheadlamp

54 Right low-beamheadlamp

Fuses Usage

55 Wipers

56 Canister ventsolenoid



61 Engine oil solenoid

62 O2 sensor 2

63 –

64 Mass air flow/Canister vent

65 Ignition/Injectors– odd

66 Daytime runninglamps 2

67 Daytime runninglamps 1

Fuses Usage

68 Auxiliary stoplamps

69 External power fortrailer

70 Upfitter stoplamps

71 Fuel heater/Flexfuel sensor


73 Lighter/Data linkconnector

74 Front blower

75 V6 fuel injectors

76 –

77 O2 sensor 1

78 Engine controlmodule/Powertrain

79 Ignition/Injectors– even


250 Vehicle Care

Relays Usage

15 Run/Crank

37 –

38 Fuel pump

39 Crank

40 A/C compressor

48 –

49 Powertrain

50 –

57 Cooling fan – low

60 Cooling fan control

Auxiliary Fuse Block

This component is near the fuseblock in the engine compartment

Fuses Usage

MR-1 Upfitter 1

MR-2 Upfitter 2

MR-3 Upfitter powercontrol

Relays Usage

MR Rel 1 Upfitter 1

MR Rel 2 Upfitter 2

Mega Fuse Holder

Fuse Usage

1 Starter motor


Vehicle Care 251

Floor Console Fuse BlockThe floor console fuse block is under the driver seat.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Mini-Fuse Usage

F1 –

F2 Steering wheelsensor

F3 Auxiliary parkinglamps

F4 Front parkinglamps

F5 Trailer parkinglamps

F6 Upfitter/Parkinglamps

F7 Right rearparking lamp

F8 Left rearparking lamp

F9 Exterior rear mirrorswitch/ Doorlock-unlock controlupfitter

F10 Airbag/Automaticoccupant sensing


252 Vehicle Care

Mini-Fuse Usage

F11 – / OnStar

F12 ECM batt

F13 HVAC 2

F14 HVAC 1

F15 –

F16 Upfitter 1

F17 Exterior rearviewheated mirrors

F18 Rear windowdefogger

F19 Compass

F20 Radio/Chime/SiriusXM satelliteradio

F21 Remote functionactuator/Tirepressure monitor

F22 Ignition switch/Discrete logicignition sensor

F23 Instrument cluster

F24 –

Mini-Fuse Usage

F25 HVAC control

F26 Auxiliary/Trailerreverse lamps

F27 Reverse lamps

F28 Upfitter 2/Readinglamps

F29 Rear blower

F30 Upfitter/Courtesylamps

F31 Front door lock

F32 Rear door lock

F33 Cargo door unlock

F34 Passenger doorunlock

F35 Rear passengerdoor unlock

F36 Driver door lock

F37 Empty

F38 –

Relays Usage

K1 Run

K2 –

K3 Parking lamps

K4 Upfitter 2

K5 Rear defogger

K6 Retainedaccessory power

CircuitBreaker

Usage

CB1 Power seats

CB2 Power windows


Vehicle Care 253

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too muchflexing. There could be ablowout and a seriouscrash. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 167.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires aremore likely to be cut,punctured, or broken bya sudden impact — suchas when hitting a pothole.Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If thetread is badly worn,replace them.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overall


254 Vehicle Care

performance on most road surfacesand weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level oftraction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires 0 254.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on ice or snow covered

roads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires 0 269.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:

. Use tires of the same brand andtread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

All-Terrain TiresThis vehicle may have All-TerrainTires. These tires provide goodperformance on most road surfaces,weather conditions, and for off-roaddriving.

The tread pattern on these tires maywear more quickly than other tires.Consider rotating the tires morefrequently than at 12 000 km(7,500 mi) intervals if irregular wearis noted when the tires areinspected. See Tire Inspection0 266.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into the sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle and lighttruck tire sidewall.


Vehicle Care 255

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

(1) Tire Size : The tire size codeis a combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification) : Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specification

code molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation) : TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture : The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG) : Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform TireQuality Grading 0 271.


256 Vehicle Care

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit : Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressure0 261 and Vehicle Load Limits0 167.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

(1) Tire Size : The tire size codeis a combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,

and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification) : Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines. This does not applyto Goodyear LT225/75R16 G949RSA and Goodyear LT225/75R16 G933 RSD commercialtruck tires.

(3) Dual Tire Maximum Load :Maximum load that can becarried and the maximumpressure needed to support thatload when used in a dualconfiguration. For information onrecommended tire pressure seeTire Pressure 0 261 and VehicleLoad Limits 0 167.

(4) DOT (Department ofTransportation) : TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture : The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(5) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN is


Vehicle Care 257

molded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(6) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(7) Single Tire MaximumLoad : Maximum load that canbe carried and the maximumpressure needed to support thatload when used as a single. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressure0 261 and Vehicle Load Limits0 167.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following examples showthe different parts of a tire size.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire :The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width : The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio : A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown in

item 3 of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is75 percent as high as it is wide.

(4) Construction Code : A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description : Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.


258 Vehicle Care

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

(1) Light Truck (LT-Metric)Tire : The United States versionof a metric tire sizing system.The letters LT as the first twocharacters in the tire size meana light truck tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width : The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio : A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem 3 of the light truck(LT-Metric) tire illustration, it

would mean that the tire'ssidewall is 75 percent as high asit is wide.

(4) Construction Code : A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Load Range : Load Range.

(7) Service Description : Theservice description indicates theload index and speed rating of atire. If two numbers are given asin the example, 120/116, thenthis represents the load index forsingle versus dual wheel usage(single/dual). The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire iscertified to carry a load. Thisdoes not apply to Goodyear

LT225/75R16 G949 RSA andGoodyear LT225/75R16 G933RSD commercial truck tires; seethe dual tire and single tiremaximum load and load rangeletter designations on the tiresidewall.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure : The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight : Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio : The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.


Vehicle Care 259

Belt : A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead : The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire : A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure : Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressure0 261.

Curb Weight : The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings : A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR : Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limits0 167.

GAWR FRT : Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 167.

GAWR RR : Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 167.

Intended Outboard Sidewall :The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa) : The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index : An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure :The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating : Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.


260 Vehicle Care

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight : The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight : Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 167.

Occupant Distribution :Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall : Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure : Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure asshown on the tire placard.See Tire Pressure 0 261 andVehicle Load Limits 0 167.

Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim : A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall : The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating : Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction : The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread : The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators : Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires0 268.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards) : A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers using


Vehicle Care 261

government testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading 0 271.

Vehicle Capacity Weight : Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 167.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire : Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard : A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits 0 167.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Caution

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:

. Unusual wear.(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight thevehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits 0 167. How thevehicle is loaded affects vehiclehandling and ride comfort. Never


262 Vehicle Care

load the vehicle with moreweight than it was designed tocarry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a monthor more.

Do not forget the spare tire,if the vehicle has one. SeeFull-Size Spare Tire 0 283 foradditional information.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressure

matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems to keep out dirt andmoisture and prevent leaks. Useonly valve caps designed for thevehicle by GM. TPMS sensorscould be damaged and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressure

levels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tire


Vehicle Care 263

causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 263.


Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors are

mounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 167.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on at


264 Vehicle Care

each ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. If the vehicle has DICbuttons, tire pressure levels can beviewed. For additional informationand details about the DIC operationand displays, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 109.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 167, for an example of theTire and Loading Information labeland its location. Also see TirePressure 0 261.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspection0 266, Tire Rotation 0 266 and Tires0 253.

Caution

Tire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning lightflashes for about one minute and

then stays on for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. A DIC warningmessage also displays. Themalfunction light and DIC warningmessage come on at each ignitioncycle until the problem is corrected.Some of the conditions that cancause these to come on are:

. One of the road tires has beenreplaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and the DIC messageshould go off after the road tireis replaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.


Vehicle Care 265. One or more TPMS sensors are

missing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires 0 269.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire pressure condition. Seeyour dealer for service if the TPMSmalfunction light and DIC messagecome on and stay on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. Also,the TPMS sensor matching processshould be performed after replacinga spare tire with a road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool. A TPMSrelearn tool can also be purchased.See Tire Pressure MonitorSensor Activation Tool atwww.gmtoolsandequipment.com orcall 1-800-GM TOOLS(1-800-468-6657).

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition on withoutstarting the vehicle. SeeIgnition Positions 0 172.

3. Press the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter's Qand K buttons at the sametime for approximatelyfive seconds. The horn soundstwice to signal the receiver is inrelearn mode and TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

If the vehicle does not haveRKE, press the DriverInformation Center (DIC)vehicle information button untilthe PRESS V TO RELEARNTIRE POSITIONS message


266 Vehicle Care

displays. The horn soundstwice to signal the receiver is inrelearn mode and TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

4. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

5. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

6. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 5. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensor

matching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

9. Turn the vehicle off.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:

. The indicators at three ormore places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 301.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Any time unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check the wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels.


Vehicle Care 267

See When It Is Time for NewTires 0 268 and WheelReplacement 0 273.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires if the vehiclehas single rear wheels.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires if the vehiclehas dual rear wheels.

When installing dual wheels,check that the vent holes in theinner and outer wheels on eachside are lined up.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated.See Tire Pressure 0 261 andVehicle Load Limits 0 167.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation 0 263.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications 0 313.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosion


268 Vehicle Care

or rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

Dual Tire RotationWhen the vehicle is new,or whenever a wheel, wheel bolt,or wheel nut is replaced or serviced,check the wheel nut torque after160, 1 600, and 10 000 km (100,1,000, and 6,000 mi) of driving. Forproper torque and wheel nuttightening information, see“Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire” under TireChanging 0 276 and “Wheel NutTorque” under Capacities andSpecifications 0 313.

The outer tire on a dual wheel setupgenerally wears faster than theinner tire. Tires last longer and wearmore evenly if they are rotated.See Tire Inspection 0 266 and TireRotation 0 266. Also seeMaintenance Schedule 0 301.

{ Warning

If the vehicle is operated with atire that is underinflated, the tirecan overheat. An overheated tirecan lose air suddenly or catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Properly inflate all tires,including the spare.

See Tires 0 253 and Tire Pressure0 261 for more information onproper tire inflation.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining.

Some commercial truck tires,including Goodyear LT225/75R16G949 RSA and Goodyear LT225/75R16 G933 RSD, may not havetreadwear indicators. If the tires donot have treadwear indicators,replace the tires when the treaddepth is down to 3.2 mm (1/8 in) forthe front tires, or 1.6 mm (1/16 in) forthe rear tires.


Vehicle Care 269

See Tire Inspection 0 266 and TireRotation 0 266 for additionalinformation.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare ifequipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Thetire manufacture date is the last fourdigits of the DOT Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN) which is molded intoone side of the tire sidewall. Thefirst two digits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits, theyear. For example, the third week ofthe year 2010 would have afour-digit DOT date of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, clean

area away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 254 for additionalinformation.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four (sixfor dual rear wheels). Uniformtread depth on all tires will helpto maintain the performance ofthe vehicle. Braking andhandling performance may beadversely affected if all the tiresare not replaced at the sametime. If proper rotation and


270 Vehicle Care

maintenance have been done,all four tires (six for dual rearwheels) should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation 0 266 for informationon proper tire rotation. However,if it is necessary to replace onlyone axle set of worn tires, placethe new tires on the rear axle(two for single rear wheels, fourfor dual rear wheels).

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

This vehicle may have adifferent size spare than theroad tires originally installedon the vehicle. When new, thevehicle included a spare tireand wheel assembly with asimilar overall diameter as theroad tires and wheels, so it isall right to drive on it. Thespare tire was developed foruse on this vehicle and will notaffect vehicle handling.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed ratedtires. Never exceed the wintertires’ maximum speed capabilitywhen using winter tires with alower speed rating.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.


Vehicle Care 271

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem 0 262.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits0 167 for the label location andmore information about the Tireand Loading Information label.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,

or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires 0 269 andAccessories and Modifications0 213.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingThe following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.


272 Vehicle Care

Quality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from the

norm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,


Vehicle Care 273

underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingare not necessary on a regularbasis. Consider an alignment checkif there is unusual tire wear or thevehicle is significantly pulling to oneside or the other. Some slight pull tothe left or right, depending on thecrown of the road and/or other roadsurface variations such as troughsor ruts, is normal. If the vehicle isvibrating when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels may needto be rebalanced. See your dealerfor proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicleground clearance, and tire or tirechain clearance to the body andchassis.


274 Vehicle Care

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ Warning

Tire chains used on a vehiclewithout the proper amount ofclearance can cause damage tothe brakes, suspension, or othervehicle parts. The area damagedby the tire chains could cause youto lose control of the vehicle andyou or others may be injured in acrash. To help avoid damage to

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the vehicle, drive slowly, readjust,or remove the device if it iscontacting the vehicle. Do notspin the vehicle's tires. Follow themanufacturer's instructions.

Caution

Use tire chains only where legaland only when necessary. Usechains that are the proper size forthe tires. Install them on the tiresof the rear axle. Do not usechains on the tires of the frontaxle. Tighten them as tightly aspossible with the ends securelyfastened. Drive slowly and followthe chain manufacturer'sinstructions. If the chains contactthe vehicle, stop and retightenthem. If the contact continues,slow down until it stops. Driving

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

too fast or spinning the wheelswith chains on will damage thevehicle.

For Cutaway models with LT245/75R16 or LT225/75R16 size singleor dual rear tires, use Low ProfileZ-Chain or SAE Class S cables.

For Cargo or Passenger modelswith LT225/75R16 or LT245/75R16size tires, use Low Profile Z-Chaincables. SAE Class S chains are notrecommended.

If the vehicle has dual rear tires, donot use individual tire chains. Usetire chains that fit across both dualtires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. See Tires0 253. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly.


Vehicle Care 275

But if there ever is a blowout, hereare a few tips about what to expectand what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severely

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

underinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers 0 123.

{ Warning

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

(Continued)


276 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

5. Place wheel blocks,if equipped, on both sides ofthe tire at the oppositecorner of the tire beingchanged.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (1), if equipped.

1. Wheel Block (If Equipped)2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

Equipment needed for a cargo vanor a passenger van is in thepassenger side rear corner of thevehicle.

Remove the retaining wing bolt andlift it off of the mounting bracket.

Equipment needed for a15-passenger seating arrangementis secured on the rear floor on thepassenger side of the vehicle.

Remove the retaining wing bolt andlift it out of the mounting bracket toaccess the equipment.


Vehicle Care 277

The tools you will be using include:

1. Jack2. Hoist Handle3. Extension(s)4. Wheel Wrench5. Jack Handle

The spare tire is mounted in the rearunderbody of the vehicle.

Use the hoist handle, extension(s),and the wheel wrench to remove theunderbody-mounted spare tire.

To lower the spare tire from thevehicle:

1. Spare Tire2. Tire/Wheel Retainer3. Hoist Cable4. Hoist Assembly5. Hoist Shaft6. Hoist Handle and

Extension(s)7. Wheel Wrench

1. Assemble the wheel wrench (7)to the hoist handle and theextension(s) (6).

2. Open the passenger siderear door.

3. Insert the chisel end of thehoist handle, on an angle,through the hole in the rearfloor panel above the bumper.

Be sure the hoist handleconnects to the hoist shaft. Thechiseled end of the hoisthandle is used to lower thespare tire.

4. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground.Continue to turn the wheelwrench until the spare tire canbe pulled out from under thevehicle.


278 Vehicle Care

5. Remove the wheel wrench,extension(s), and hoist handleassembly from the hoist shaft.

6. When the tire has beenlowered, pull it closer to reachthe tire retainer and pull it upthrough the wheel opening.

For a vehicle that wascompleted from a cab andchassis, refer to the informationfrom the body supplier/installer.

The spare tire is a full-size tire,like the other tires on thevehicle.

7. Put the spare tire near theflat tire.

8. Close the passenger siderear door.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

If the vehicle has plastic wheel nutcaps, loosen them by turning thewheel wrench counterclockwise.The wheel nut caps are designed toremain with the center cap. Removethe center cap.

If the wheel has a smooth centerpiece, place the chisel end of thewheel wrench in the slot on thewheel and gently pry it out.

1. Jack2. Hoist Handle3. Extension(s)

4. Wheel Wrench5. Jack Handle

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat 0 274.

2. Loosen all the wheel nuts withthe wheel wrench. Do notremove them yet.

3. Assemble the jack and tools:

Front Flat: Assemble thejack (1) together with the jackhandle (5), one or twoextension(s) (3), and the wheelwrench (4).

Rear Flat: Assemble thejack (1) together with the jackhandle (5), two extensions (3),and the wheel wrench (4).


Vehicle Care 279

Front Position

Front Position

Rear Position

Rear Alternative Position (DieselVehicles)

4. Position the jack under thevehicle, as shown.

The front position jacking pointis on the frame. The rearposition jacking point is on therear axle.

If the exhaust system interfereswith the jack location in therear axle, such as in Dieselvehicles, place the jack (1) onthe rear axle between the axlehousing and the shockabsorber bracket in order toavoid any interference with theexhaust pipe (2).

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack you couldbe badly injured or killed. Neverget under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.


280 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

5. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the vehicle.Raise the vehicle far enoughoff the ground so there isenough room for the spare tireto fit.

6. Remove all the wheel nuts.

7. Take the flat tire off of themounting surface.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a paper

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

towel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

8. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.


Vehicle Care 281

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

9. Put the wheel nuts back onwith the rounded end of thenuts toward the wheel. Tighteneach wheel nut by hand untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

10. Turn the jack handlecounterclockwise to lower thevehicle. Lower the jackcompletely.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are not tight canwork loose. If all the nuts on awheel come off, the wheel cancome off the vehicle, causing acrash. All wheel nuts must beproperly tightened. Follow therules in this section to be surethey are.

{ Warning

If wheel studs are damaged, theycan break. If all the studs on awheel broke, the wheel couldcome off and cause a crash.If any stud is damaged becauseof a loose-running wheel, it couldbe that all of the studs aredamaged. To be sure, replace all

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

studs on the wheel. If the studholes in a wheel have becomelarger, the wheel could collapse inoperation. Replace any wheel ifits stud holes have become largeror distorted in any way. Inspecthubs and hub‐piloted wheels fordamage. Because of looserunning wheels, piloting paddamage may occur and requirereplacement of the entire hub, forproper centering of the wheels.When replacing studs, hubs,wheel nuts or wheels, be sure touse GM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrench

(Continued)


282 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

to the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 313 for originalequipment wheel nut torquespecifications.

Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid expensivebrake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the propersequence and to the propertorque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications0 313 for the wheel nut torquespecification.

11. Use the wheel wrench totighten the nuts firmly. Turn thewheel wrench clockwise and ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

12. Put the wheel cover or thecenter cap and plastic wheelnut caps back on. Remove anywheel blocks.

Have a technician check thewheel nut tightness of allwheels with a torque wrench

after the first 160 km (100 mi)and then 1 600 km (1,000 mi)after that. Repeat this servicewhenever a tire is removed orserviced. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 313 for moreinformation.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

1. Put the tire on the ground atthe rear of the vehicle with thevalve stem pointed down.


Vehicle Care 283

2. Pull the retaining bar throughthe center of the wheel, makingsure it is properly attached.

3. Pull the wheel toward the rearof the vehicle, keeping thecable tight.

4. Open the passenger siderear door.

5. Insert the chisel end of thehoist handle, on an angle,through the hole in the rearfloor panel above the bumper.

6. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to fully raise the tireagainst the underside of thevehicle. Continue turning thewheel wrench until the tire issecure and the cable is tight.

Two clicks should occur. Thespare tire hoist cannot beovertightened.

7. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull (1), andthen try to turn (2) the tire.If the tire moves, use the wheelwrench to tighten the cable.

Two clicks mean the tire is upall the way.

8. Return the jacking equipmentto the proper location. Securethe items and replace the jackcover.

Full-Size Spare TireIf this vehicle came with a full-sizespare tire, it was fully inflated whennew, however, it can lose air overtime. Check the inflation pressureregularly. See Tire Pressure 0 261and Vehicle Load Limits 0 167. Forinstructions on how to remove,install, or store a spare tire, see TireChanging 0 276.

After installing the spare tire on thevehicle, stop as soon as possibleand check that the spare is correctlyinflated. The spare tire is made toperform well at speeds up to112 km/h (70 mph) at therecommended inflation pressure, soyou can finish your trip.

Have the damaged or flat road tirerepaired or replaced back onto thevehicle, as soon as possible, so thespare tire will be available in case itis needed again.

Do not mix tires and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they will notfit. Keep the spare tire and its wheeltogether.


284 Vehicle Care

Jump Starting

Jump Starting - NorthAmericaFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery - NorthAmerica 0 236.

If the vehicle battery has run down,you may want to use anothervehicle and some jumper cables tostart your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Batteries alsocontain other chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer. WASH HANDS AFTER

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

HANDLING. For more informationgo to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See California Proposition65 Warning 0 212 and the backcover.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Caution

Ignoring these steps could resultin costly damage to the vehiclethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Trying to startthe vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damagethe vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle.It must have a 12-volt batterywith a negative ground system.

Caution

If the other vehicle does not havea 12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables canreach, but be sure the vehiclesare not touching each other.If they are, it could cause a


Vehicle Care 285

ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able tostart your vehicle, and the badgrounding could damage theelectrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parkingbrake.

Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible, turnoff or unplug all accessories oneither vehicle when jump starting.

3. Turn the ignition off on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into the

cigarette lighter or theaccessory power outlet. Turnoff the radio and all lamps thatare not needed. This will avoidsparks and help save bothbatteries. And it could save theradio!

4. Open the hoods and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations of the othervehicle.

On your van, use the unpaintedradio antenna bracket as aremote negative (−) terminal.

{ Warning

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it in

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

your eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ Warning

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cablesdo not have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehiclescould be damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) willgo to positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to an unpainted metalpart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.


286 Vehicle Care

On your van, use the unpaintedradio antenna bracket as aremote negative (−) terminal.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on thedead battery because this cancause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+)terminal of the dead battery.Use a remote positive (+)

terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

7. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step.The other end of thenegative (−) cable does not goto the dead battery. It goes to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle with thedead battery. On your van, usethe unpainted radio antennabracket as a remotenegative (−) terminal.

8. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal locationon the vehicle with the deadbattery. On your van, use theunpainted radio antennabracket as a remotenegative (−) terminal.

Caution

The vehicle uses the unpaintedradio antenna bracket as aremote negative (-) terminal.Move the antenna coaxial cable

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 287

Caution (Continued)

out of the way before clampingthe negative jumper cable to thefixed antenna bracket. Avoidtouching the negative cable clampto the air conditioning line. Failureto do either of these coulddamage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

9. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run theengine for a while.

10. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Caution

If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables donot touch each other or othermetal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

After starting the disabled vehicleand removing the jumper cables,allow it to idle for several minutes.

Towing the Vehicle

Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage. Thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Do not lash or hook tosuspension components. Use theproper straps around the tires tosecure the vehicle.

Use only a flatbed tow truck fortowing a disabled vehicle. Neveruse a sling type lift or damage willoccur. Use ramps to help reduceapproach angles if necessary.A towed vehicle should have itsdrive wheels off the ground.

Consult a professional towingservice if the disabled vehicle mustbe towed.


288 Vehicle Care

Front Attachment Points

The vehicle is equipped withspecific attachment points to beused to pull the vehicle onto aflatbed car carrier from a flat roadsurface. Do not use theseattachment points to pull the vehiclefrom snow, mud or sand.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle, such as behind a motorhome. The two most common types

of recreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:

. What is the towing capacity ofthe towing vehicle? Be sure toread the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betraveled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Caution

Use of a shield mounted in frontof the vehicle grille could restrictairflow and cause damage to thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If using a shield, onlyuse one that attaches to thetowing vehicle.


Vehicle Care 289

Dinghy Towing

Caution

If the vehicle is towed with all fourwheels on the ground, thedrivetrain components could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not tow the vehiclewith all four wheels on theground.

The vehicle should not be towedwith all four wheels on the ground.

Dolly Towing

Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off theGround)

To tow the vehicle from the rear:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.

3. Firmly set the parking brake.See Parking Brake 0 185.

4. Put the transmission inP (Park).

5. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.

6. Use an adequate clampingdevice designed for towing toensure that the front wheelsare locked into the straightposition.

7. Turn the ignition to off.

If the tow vehicle will not bestarted or driven for six weeksor more, remove the batterycable from the negativeterminal (post) of the battery toprevent the battery fromdraining while towing.


290 Vehicle Care

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 308.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Caution

Do not use petroleum-based,acidic, or abrasive cleaningagents as they can damage thevehicle's paint, metal, or plasticparts. If damage occurs, it wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

your dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions, andappropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

Caution

Avoid using high-pressurewashes closer than 30 cm (12 in)to the surface of the vehicle. Useof power washers exceeding8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can resultin damage or removal of paintand decals.

Caution

Do not power wash anycomponent under the hood that

has thise symbol.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

This could cause damage thatwould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

If using an automatic car wash,follow the car wash instructions. Thewindshield wiper and rear windowwiper, if equipped, must be off.Remove any accessories that maybe damaged or interfere with the carwash equipment.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer to


Vehicle Care 291

have the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can resultin a hazy white finish or pitting.This damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum, chrome,or stainless steel. To preventdamage always follow thesecleaning instructions:

. Be sure the molding is cool tothe touch before applying anycleaning solution.

. Use only approved cleaningsolutions for aluminum, chrome,or stainless steel. Somecleaners are highly acidic orcontain alkaline substances andcan damage the moldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the molding finish.


292 Vehicle Care

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals, andStripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses,emblems, decals, and stripes.Follow instructions under "Washingthe Vehicle" previously in thissection.

Lamp covers are made of plastic,and some have a UV protectivecoating. Do not clean or wipe themwhile they are dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:

. Abrasive or caustic agents.

. Washer fluids and other cleaningagents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels,or other harsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

. Aftermarket appearance caps orcovers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessiveheat generated.

Caution

Failure to clean lamps properlycan cause damage to the lampcover that would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Using wax on low gloss blackfinish stripes can increase thegloss level and create anon-uniform finish. Clean lowgloss stripes with soap andwater only.

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakes,between the hood and windshieldwhen washing the vehicle.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply weatherstrip lubricant onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstrips atleast once a year. Hot, dry climatesmay require more frequentapplication. Black marks fromrubber material on painted surfaces


Vehicle Care 293

can be removed by rubbing with aclean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 308.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Caution

Using petroleum-based tiredressing products on the vehiclemay damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off anyoverspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Caution

Chrome wheels and other chrometrim may be damaged if thevehicle is not washed after drivingon roads that have been sprayedwith magnesium, calcium,or sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

Caution

To avoid surface damage, do notuse strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners,brushes, or cleaners that containacid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that uses

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Brake System

Visually inspect brake lines andhoses for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspectdisc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Inspect drumbrake linings/shoes for wear orcracks. Inspect all other brake parts.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs of wear atleast once a year.

Inspect power steering for properattachment, connections, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.


294 Vehicle Care

Visually check constant velocity jointboots and axle seals for leaks.

Lubricate the upper and lowercontrol arm ball joints, at least everyother engine oil change.

Lubricate the tie rod ball joints, idlerarm pivot shaft bearings, idler armsocket, and pitman arm socket, atleast every other engine oil change.

Caution

Lubrication of applicable steering/suspension points should not bedone unless the temperature is−12 °C (10 °F) or higher,or damage could result.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and thefuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, spring and fall,use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure watercan overcome the seals andcontaminate the fluid. Contaminatedfluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and/or axles andshould be replaced.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface. See “Finish Care”previously in this section.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils.Newspapers or dark garments cantransfer color to the vehicle’sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately remove


Vehicle Care 295

hand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Use cleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces being cleaned toprevent permanent damage. Applyall cleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners on anyswitches or controls. Removecleaners quickly.

Before using cleaners, read andfollow all safety instructions on thelabel. While cleaning the interior,open the doors and windows to getproper ventilation.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:

. Never use a razor or any othersharp object to remove soil fromany interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with too muchpressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.8 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willcreate streaks and attract dirt.Do not use solutions that containstrong or caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.If necessary, use a commercialglass cleaner after cleaning withplain water.

Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six monthsof ownership will reduce tendencyto fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with waterand mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.

. When lightly soiled, wipe with asponge or soft, lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.


296 Vehicle Care

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating vacuum brush attachment isbeing used, only use it on the floorcarpet. Before cleaning, gentlyremove as much of the soil aspossible:

. Gently blot liquids with a papertowel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean, lint-freecolorfast cloth with water.Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning cloth

to a clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by plainwater.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

After cleaning, use a paper towel toblot excess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

Use a microfiber cloth on high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays. First,use a soft bristle brush to removedirt that can scratch the surface.Then gently clean by rubbing with amicrofiber cloth. Never use windowcleaners or solvents. Periodicallyhand wash the microfiber clothseparately, using mild soap. Do notuse bleach or fabric softener. Rinsethoroughly and air dry beforenext use.

Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. Thismay cause damage and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.


Vehicle Care 297

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,Low Gloss Paint Surfaces, andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, aswell as other interior surfaces,may cause permanent damage.Wipe excess moisture from thesesurfaces after cleaning and allowthem to dry naturally. Never useheat, steam, or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently change

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

the appearance and feel ofleather or soft trim, and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plasticsand painted surfaces. If an airfreshener comes in contact withany plastic or painted surface inthe vehicle, blot immediately andclean with a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.Damage caused by air freshenerswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

If equipped, wash with warm waterand mild detergent. Do not usechlorine bleach. Rinse with coldwater, and then dry completely.

Care of Seat Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye seat beltwebbing. It may severely weakenthe webbing. In a crash, theymight not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean andrinse seat belt webbing only withmild soap and lukewarm water.Allow the webbing to dry.


298 Vehicle Care

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.

. The original equipment floormats were designed for thevehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the pedals. Alwayscheck that the floor mats do notinterfere with the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.


Service and Maintenance 299

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 299

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 301

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . . . 311

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the place

for routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

Do not have chemical flushes thatare not approved by GMperformed on the vehicle. Theuse of flushes, solvents, cleaners,or lubricants that are notapproved by GM could damagethe vehicle, requiring expensiverepairs that are not covered bythe vehicle warranty.


300 Service and Maintenance

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services. TheAdditional Required Services -Normal are for vehicles that:

. Carry passengers and cargowithin recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limits0 167.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeFuel 0 195.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services -Severe are for vehicles that are:

. Mainly driven in heavy city trafficin hot weather

. Mainly driven in hilly ormountainous terrain

. Frequently towing a trailer

. Used for high speed orcompetitive driving

. Used for taxi, police, or deliveryservice

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Severe chart.

{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work 0 213.



MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop

. Check the engine oil level. SeeEngine Oil 0 218.

Once a Month

. Check the tire inflationpressures. See Tire Pressure0 261.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection 0 266.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid0 233.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven

under the best conditions, theengine oil life system may notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor up to a year. The engine oil andfilter must be changed at least oncea year and the oil life system mustbe reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System 0 220.

Power Take Off (PTO) andExtended Idle Use

When the vehicle is used with thePTO equipment or used in a waythat requires extended idle time,one hour of use shall be deemedthe same as 53 km (33 mi). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 109 for hourmeter.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation 0 266.

. Check engine oil level and oillife percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter,and reset oil life system.See Engine Oil 0 218 andEngine Oil Life System 0 220.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeCooling System 0 226.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid 0 233.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare 0 290. Replace worn ordamaged wiper blades. SeeWiper Blade Replacement0 240.


302 Service and Maintenance. Check tire inflation pressures.

See Tire Pressure 0 261.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection 0 266.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter0 225.

. Inspect brake system. SeeExterior Care 0 290.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care 0 290.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck 0 55.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care 0 290.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check 0 239.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check0 239.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck 0 240.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check0 240.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. If the holdopen is low, service the gasstrut. See Gas Strut(s) 0 241.

. Lubricate the steering linkage(greasable joints). See Normaland Severe MaintenanceSchedules. For severecommercial use vehicles, seeSpecial Application Services0 305.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Normal

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.Lubricate the steering linkage.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (1) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (2) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (3) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (4) @

Replace brake fluid. (5)

Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Normal

(1) Visually check all fuel and vaporlines and hoses for properattachment, connection, routing, andcondition.

(2) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.

(3) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System0 226.

(4) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(5) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears. See Brake Fluid 0 235.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Severe

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.Lubricate the steering linkage.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (1) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (2) @ @ @

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter. @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (3) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (4) @

Replace brake fluid. (5)

Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Severe

(1) Visually check all fuel and vaporlines and hoses for properattachment, connection, routing, andcondition.

(2) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.

(3) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System0 226.

(4) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(5) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears. See Brake Fluid 0 235.



Special ApplicationServices. Vehicles with Dual Wheels:

Check dual wheel nut torque at160, 1 600, and 10 000 km (100,1,000, and 6,000 mi) of driving.Repeat this service whenever atire/wheel is serviced orremoved.

. Severe Commercial UseVehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every oil change.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See “UnderbodyMaintenance” in Exterior Care0 290.

AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.

Battery

The 12-volt battery supplies powerto start the engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.

. To avoid break-down or failure tostart the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts

. Belts may need replacing if theysqueak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.



Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.

. Signs of brake wear may includechirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 308 for GM approvedfluids.

. Engine oil and windshieldwasher fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.

. Signs that the headlamps needattention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.

. Signs of wear may includesteering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.



Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel,and can reduce the risk of tirefailure.

. Signs that the tires need to bereplaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care 0 294 andExterior Care 0 290.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.

. Signs that the alignment mayneed to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.

. Signs of damage includescratches, cracks, and chips.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.

. Signs of wear include streaking,skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsThis maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see themaintenance schedule section in the Duramax diesel supplement.

Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Automatic Transmission (6-SpeedTransmission)

DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Automatic Transmission (8-SpeedTransmission)

DEXRON-HP Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 19331925, inCanada 19300537).

Chassis Lubrication, Parking BrakeCable Guides

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Cooling System 0 226.

Engine Oil Engine oil meeting the dexos1 specification of the proper SAE viscositygrade. ACDelco dexos1 is recommended. See Engine Oil 0 218.

Front Wheel Bearings Wheel bearing lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category GC orGC-LB (GM Part No. 1051344, in Canada 993037).

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19353126, inCanada 19299819).



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Key Lock Cylinders, Hood Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 19329450, in Canada 89021186).

Rear Axle (Dual Rear Wheels) SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 88900401, inCanada 89021678).

Rear Axle (Single Rear Wheels) SAE 75W-85 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 19300457, inCanada 19300458).

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orequivalent.

Weatherstrip Squeaks Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, inCanada 10953437).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.



Maintenance Replacement PartsIf the vehicle has the Duramax diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement.

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

4.3L V6 Engine 84065602 A3228C

6.0L V8 Engine 84000015 A3221C

Engine Oil Filter

4.3L V6 Engine 19330000 PF63E

6.0L V8 Engine 19303975 PF48E

Spark Plugs

4.3L V6 Engine 12622441 41-114

6.0L V8 Engine 12621258 41-110

Wiper Blades – 56.0 cm (22 in) 15214346 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed


312 Technical Data

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 315

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe driver side of the vehicle. It canbe seen through the windshield fromoutside. The Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) also appears on theVehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacement

parts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specifications0 313 for the vehicle's engine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThere may be a label on the on therear edge of the passenger sidefront door that contains the followinginformation:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

. Model designation

. Paint information

. Production options and specialequipment

If there is no label, there is abarcode on the certification label onthe center (B) pillar to scan for thissame information.


Technical Data 313

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsIf the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.

The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 308 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System without Rear Heat

4.3L V6 10.1 L 10.7 qt

6.0L V8 13.1 L 13.8 qt

Cooling System with Rear Heat

4.3L V6 12.4 L 13.1 qt

6.0L V8 16.1 L 17.0 qt

Engine Oil with Filter 5.7 L 6.0 qt

Fuel Tank

Cutaway (Optional Tank)* 215.7 L 57.0 gal


314 Technical Data

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Cutaway (Standard Tank) 124.9 L 33.0 gal

Passenger and Cargo 117.3 L 31.0 gal

* 4 039 mm (159 in) wheelbase or 4 496 mm (177 in) wheelbase only

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

4.3L V6 (LV1) P Automatic 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–0.043 in)

6.0L V8 (L96) G Automatic 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–0.043 in)

6.0L V8 (LC8) (Capable ofBeing Upfit for Gaseous Fuel)

B Automatic 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–0.043 in)


Technical Data 315

Engine Drive Belt Routing

4.3L V6 Engine (LV1)

6.0L V8 Engine (L96/LC8)

If equipped with a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.


316 Customer Information

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 319

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . 319GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 323Service Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 328OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 329

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toGMC. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE : Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.

STEP TWO : If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot be


Customer Information 317

resolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call1-800-462-8782. In Canada, callGeneral Motors of CanadaCustomer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting GMC, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility. That iswhy we suggest following Step Onefirst.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners :Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line Program toenforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.3033 Wilson Blvd.Suite 600Arlington, VA 22201

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100http://www.bbb.org/council/programs-services/dispute-handling-and-resolution/bbb-auto-line

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

STEP THREE — CanadianOwners : In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps One



and Two, General Motors of CanadaCompany wants you to be aware ofits participation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of CanadaCompany has committed to bindingarbitration of owner disputesinvolving factory-related vehicleservice claims. The programprovides for the review of the factsinvolved by an impartial third partyarbiter, and may include an informalhearing before the arbiter. Theprogram is designed so that theentire dispute settlement process,from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should becompleted in about 70 days. Webelieve our impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of CanadaCompanyMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesGMC encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail GMC, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.GMC.com

1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782)1-888-889-2438 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-888-881-3302

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of CanadaCompanyCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gmc.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.



Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user in the U.S.can communicate with GMC bydialing: 1-888-889-2438. TTY usersin Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.gmc.com

The GMC online owner experienceis a one-stop resource that allowsinteraction with GMC and keepsimportant vehicle-specificinformation in one place.

Membership Benefits

E : Download owner’s manualsand view vehicle-specific how-tovideos.

G : View maintenance schedules,alerts, and OnStar onboard vehiclediagnostic information. Scheduleservice appointments.

I : View and print dealer-recordedservice records and self-recordedservice records.

D : Select a dealer and viewlocations, maps, phone numbers,and hours.

r : Track your vehicle’s warrantyinformation.

J : View active recalls by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)0 312.

H : View GM Card, SiriusXMSatellite radio (if equipped), andOnStar account information (ifequipped).

F : Chat live with online helprepresentatives.

See my.gmc.com to register yourvehicle.

GMC Centre (Canada) gmc.ca

Take a trip to the GMC Centre:

. Chat live with online helprepresentatives.

. Use the Vehicle Tools section.

. Access third party enthusiastsites and social media networks.

. Locate resources such aslease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips, and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner’s manualfor your vehicle, quickly andeasily.

. Find the GMC-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.



GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement, up to certain limits,of eligible aftermarket adaptiveequipment required for the vehicle,such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift for thevehicle.

To learn about the GM Mobilityprogram, see www.gmmobility.comor call the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility program. See www.gm.caor call 1-800-GM-DRIVE(800-463-7483) for details. TTYusers call 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-888-881-3302; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:

. Your name, home address, andhome telephone number

. Telephone number of yourlocation

. Location of the vehicle

. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

. Description of the problem

Coverage

Services are provided for theduration of the vehicle's powertrainwarranty.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.General Motors North America andGMC reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

General Motors North America andGMC reserve the right to limitservices or payment to an owner ordriver if they decide the claims aremade too often, or the same type ofclaim is made many times.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.


Customer Information 321. Lock-Out Service: Service to

unlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest GMC dealer for warrantyservice, or if the vehicle was in acrash and cannot be driven.Assistance is not given when thevehicle is stuck in the sand,mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyevent, incidental expenses maybe reimbursed within thePowertrain warranty period.Items considered are reasonableand customary hotel, meals,rental car, or a vehicle beingdelivered back to the customer,up to 500 miles.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws

. Legal fines

. Mounting, dismounting,or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices

Service is not provided if a vehicleis in an area that is not accessibleto the service vehicle or is not aregularly traveled or maintainedpublic road, which includes ice andwinter roads. Off-road use is notcovered.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is up to 7 L. Diesel fuel deliverymay be restricted. Propane andother fuels are not providedthrough this service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over150 km from where your trip wasstarted to qualify.Pre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders are required.Once authorization has beenreceived, the RoadsideAssistance advisor will help tomake arrangements and explainhow to receive payment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,



after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

The Courtesy Transportationprogram is no longer available forcutaway vehicles.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate booklet

entitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to do so, yourdealer may offer the followingtransportation options:

Shuttle Service

This includes one-way or round-tripshuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters ofyour dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If overnight warranty repairs areneeded, and public transportation isused, the expense must besupported by original receipts andwithin the maximum amount allowedby GM for shuttle service. If U.S.customers arrange their owntransportation, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuel



expenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

For an overnight warranty repair, thedealer may provide an availablecourtesy rental vehicle or provide forreimbursement of a rental vehicle.Reimbursement is limited and mustbe supported by original receipts aswell as a signed and completedrental agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.Additional fees such as fuel usagecharges, taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usagebeyond the completion of the repairare also your responsibility.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Contact your dealerfor specific availability.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.



Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate-of-the-art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacement

parts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program0 320.

Gather the following information:

. Driver name, address, andtelephone number

. Driver license number

. Owner name, address, andtelephone number

. Vehicle license plate number


Customer Information 325. Vehicle make, model, and

model year

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

. Insurance company and policynumber

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? 0 62.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycled

original GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner’s Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner’s Manual, and WarrantyManual.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 –$40.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.



Without Pouch: Owner’sManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Service and Owner publications areavailable for many current and pastmodel year GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomplies with Part 15/Part 18 of theFederal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules and withInnovation, Science and EconomicDevelopment (ISED) Canada'sRSP-100 / license-exempt RSS's /ICES-001.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.



Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has asafety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, and notifyGeneral Motors of CanadaCompany. Call TransportCanada at 1-800-333-0510;go to:

www.tc.gc.ca/recalls (English)

www.tc.gc.ca/rappels (French)

or write to:

Transport CanadaMotor Vehicle Safety DirectorateDefect Investigations andRecalls Division80 Noel StreetGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1



Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-GMC-8782(1-800-462-8782), or write:

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of CanadaCompanyCustomer Care Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:

. How various systems in yourvehicle were operating;

. Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.



These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur.

NoteEDR data are recorded by yourvehicle only if a non-trivial crashsituation occurs; no data arerecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) are recorded.However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access these data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStarIf the vehicle is equipped withOnStar and has an active serviceplan, additional data may becollected through the OnStarsystem. This includes informationabout the vehicle’s operation;collisions involving the vehicle; theuse of the vehicle and its features;and, in certain situations, thelocation and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to the

OnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

See OnStar Additional Information0 336.

Infotainment SystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system as part of theinfotainment system, use of thesystem may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.See the infotainment manual forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.


330 OnStar

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

OnStar Overview

= Voice Command Button

Q Blue OnStar Button

> Red Emergency Button

This vehicle may be equipped with acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to an OnStarAdvisor for Emergency, Security,Navigation, Connections, andDiagnostics Services. OnStarservices may require a paid serviceplan and data plan. OnStar requiresthe vehicle battery and electricalsystem, cellular service, and GPSsatellite signals to be available andoperating. OnStar acts as a link toexisting emergency serviceproviders. OnStar may collect

information about you and yourvehicle, including locationinformation. See OnStar UserTerms, Privacy Statement, andSoftware Terms for more detailsincluding system limitations atwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:

. Solid Green: System is ready.

. Flashing Green: On a call.

. Red: Indicates a problem.

. Off: System is off. Press Qtwice to speak with an OnStarAdvisor.

PressQ or call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton may vary by vehicle andregion.


OnStar 331

Press= to:

. Open the OnStar app on theinfotainment display. See theinfotainment manual forinformation on how to use theOnStar app.

Or

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.

. Obtain and customize the Wi-Fihotspot name or SSID andpassword, if equipped.

PressQ to connect to anAdvisor to:

. Verify account information orupdate contact information.

. Get driving directions.

. Receive a Diagnostic check ofthe vehicle's key operatingsystems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

. Manage Wi-Fi Settings,if equipped.

Press> to get a priority connectionto an OnStar Advisor available24/7 to:

. Get help for an emergency.

. Be a Good Samaritan orrespond to an AMBER Alert.

. Get assistance in severeweather or other crisis situationsand find evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyEmergency Services require anactive, OnStar service plan(excludes Basic Plan). WithAutomatic Crash Response, built-insensors can automatically alert aspecially trained OnStar Advisorwho is immediately connected in tothe vehicle to help.

Press> for a priority connection toan OnStar Advisor who can contactemergency service providers, directthem to your exact location, andrelay important information.

With OnStar Crisis Assist, speciallytrained Advisors are available24 hours a day, 7 days a week, toprovide a central point of contact,assistance, and information during acrisis.

With Roadside Assistance, Advisorscan locate a nearby service providerto help with a flat tire, a batteryjump, or an empty gas tank.


332 OnStar

SecurityIf equipped, OnStar provides theseservices:

. With Stolen Vehicle Assistance,OnStar Advisors can use GPS topinpoint the vehicle and helpauthorities quickly recover it.

. With Remote Ignition Block,if equipped, OnStar can blockthe engine from being restarted.

. With Stolen Vehicle Slowdown,if equipped, OnStar can workwith law enforcement togradually slow the vehicle down.

Theft Alarm Notification

If equipped, if the doors are lockedand the vehicle alarm sounds, anotification by text, e-mail, or phonecall will be sent. If the vehicle isstolen, an OnStar Advisor can workwith authorities to recover thevehicle.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires aspecific OnStar service plan.

PressQ to receive Turn-by-Turndirections or have them sent to thevehicle’s navigation screen,if equipped.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to anAdvisor.

2. Request directions to bedownloaded to the vehicle.

3. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton may vary by vehicle andregion. For some vehicles, press=to open the OnStar app on theinfotainment display. For othervehicles press= as follows.

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

3. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview


2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” Systemresponds with the last directiongiven, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Get My Destination



OnStar 333

2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with theaddress and distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Send Destination to Vehicle

Directions can be sent to thevehicle’s navigation screen,if equipped.

PressQ, then ask the Advisor todownload directions to the vehicle’snavigation system, if equipped. Afterthe call ends, the navigation screenwill provide prompts to begin drivingdirections. Routes that are sent tothe navigation screen can only becanceled through the navigationsystem.

See www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsThe following OnStar services helpwith staying connected.

For coverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

Ensuring Security

. Change the default passwordsfor the Wi-Fi hotspot andmyGMC mobile application.Make these passwords differentfrom each other and use acombination of letters, numbers,and symbols to increase thesecurity.

. Change the default name of theSSID (Service Set Identifier).This is your network’s name thatis visible to other wirelessdevices. Choose a unique nameand avoid family names orvehicle descriptions.

OnStar Wi-Fi Hotspot (If Equipped)

The vehicle may have a built-inWi-Fi hotspot that provides accessto the Internet and web content at4G LTE speed. Up to seven mobiledevices can be connected. A dataplan is required. Use the in-vehiclecontrols only when it is safe todo so.

1. To retrieve Wi-Fi hotspotinformation, press= to openthe OnStar app on theinfotainment display, thenselect Wi-Fi Hotspot. On somevehicles, touch Wi-Fi or Wi-FiSettings on the screen.

2. The Wi-Fi settings will displaythe Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID),password, and on somevehicles, the connection type(no Internet connection, 3G,4G, 4G LTE), and signal quality(poor, good, excellent).

3. To change the SSID orpassword, pressQ or call1-888-4ONSTAR to connectwith an Advisor. On somevehicles, the SSID andpassword can be changed inthe Wi-Fi Hotspot menu.

After initial set-up, your vehicle’sWi-Fi hotspot will connectautomatically to your mobiledevices. Manage data usage byturning Wi-Fi on or off on yourmobile device, using the myGMCmobile app, or by contacting an


334 OnStar

OnStar Advisor. On some vehicles,Wi-Fi can also be managed from theWi-Fi Hotspot menu.

MyGMC Mobile App (If Available)

Download the myGMC mobile appto compatible Apple and Androidsmartphones. GMC users canaccess the following services from asmartphone:

. Remotely start/stop the vehicle,if factory-equipped.

. Lock/unlock doors, if equippedwith automatic locks.

. Activate the horn and lamps.

. Check the vehicle’s fuel level, oillife, or tire pressure,if factory-equipped with the TirePressure Monitor System.

. Send destinations to the vehicle.

. Locate the vehicle on a map(U.S. market only).

. Turn the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspoton/off, manage settings, andmonitor data consumption,if equipped.

. Locate a dealer and scheduleservice.

. Request roadside assistance.

. Set a parking reminder with pindrop, take a photo, make a note,and set a timer.

. Connect with GMC on socialmedia.

For myGMC mobile app informationand compatibility, seewww.my.gmc.com.

An active OnStar service,compatible device, factory-installedremote start, and power locks arerequired. Data rates apply. Seeonstar.com for details and systemlimitations.

Remote Services

Contact an OnStar Advisor tounlock the doors or sound the hornand flash the lamps.

OnStar AtYourService

OnStar Advisors can provide offersfrom restaurants and retailers onyour route, help locate hotels,or book a room. These servicesvary by market.

OnStar Hands-Free Calling

Make and receive calls with thebuilt-in wireless calling service,which requires available minutes.Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton may vary by vehicle andregion. For some vehicles, press=to open the OnStar app on theinfotainment display, then selectHands-Free calling. For othervehicles press= as follows.

Make a Call

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Call. Please say the name ornumber to call.”


OnStar 335

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK, calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency


2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Call. Please say the name ornumber to call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing.System responds: “911.”

4. Say “Call.” System responds:“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is,”then says the number.

End a Call

Press=. System responds: “Callended.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Press= and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

DiagnosticsBy monitoring and reporting on thevehicle’s key systems, OnStarAdvanced Diagnostics provides away to keep up on maintenance.Capabilities vary by model. Seewww.onstar.com for details andsystem limitations. Message anddata rates may apply.

Advanced Diagnostics requires anactive OnStar paid service plan,e-mail address on file, andenrollment in Advanced Diagnostics.

Includes:

. Diagnostic Alerts: Setpreferences to receive real-timee-mails, texts, or monthlyreports of the vehicle’s health.Or pressQ to have an Advisorinitiate a remote diagnosticreport.

. Proactive Alerts: Receive areal-time e-mail or text messageregarding potential issues withkey vehicle components, suchas the battery, fuel system,or starter system. Alerts forpotential issues appear on theinfotainment display. ProactiveAlerts are designed to helppredict specific types of issuesbased on information collectedfrom the vehicle. Other factorsmay affect vehicle performance.Not all issues will deliver alerts.In some cases, a dealer servicecheck may be required toconfirm the accuracy of thealerts.

. Dealer Maintenance Notification:Have the vehicle notify yourpreferred dealer when it is timefor maintenance. Your dealer willthen contact you to set up anappointment.

To begin, pressQ to speak to anAdvisor, or see www.onstar.com.


336 OnStar

OnStar AdditionalInformationOnStar Smart Driver

OnStar Smart Driver providesinformation about driving behavior tohelp maximize overall vehicleperformance, reduce wear and tear,and enhance fuel efficiency. AnInsurance Discounts Eligibilityfeature is also offered within OnStarSmart Driver. See www.onstar.comfor details regarding vehicleeligibility and system limitations.OnStar, General Motors, and theiraffiliates are not insuranceproviders. Obtain insurance onlyfrom licensed insurance providers.

In-Vehicle Audio Messages

Audio messages may play importantinformation at the following times:

. Prior to vehicle purchase.PressQ to set up an account.

. With the OnStar Basic Plan,every 60 days.

. After change in ownership andat 90 days.

Transferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan cancel or change accountinformation.

Selling/Transferring theVehicle

Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) immediately toterminate your OnStar services ifthe vehicle is disposed of, sold,transferred, or if the lease ends.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible. The Advisor will updatevehicle records and explain OnStarservice options.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance,

Advanced Vehicle Diagnostics,Remote Services, RoadsideAssistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar User Terms,Privacy Statement, and SoftwareTerms:

. Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).

. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).

. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.

. PressQ to speak with anAdvisor.

OnStar services cannot work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area. The wireless serviceprovider must also have coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStar


OnStar 337

services. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar services may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar services maynot work. Other problems beyondthe control of OnStar — such ashills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather,electrical system design andarchitecture of the vehicle, damageto the vehicle in a crash, or wirelessphone network congestion orjamming — may prevent service.


Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpwith physical disabilities andmedical conditions.

PressQ to help:

. Locate a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Find a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Provide directions to the closesthospital or pharmacy in urgentsituations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer-installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access someOnStar services. The PIN will needto be changed the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. To

change the OnStar PIN, contact anOnStar Advisor by pressingQ orcalling 1-888-4ONSTAR.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the vehiclewarranty.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in multiple languages.PressQ and ask for an Advisor.Advisors are available in English,Spanish, and French. Availablelanguages may vary by country.

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleAssistance after the vehicle hasbeen off continuously for 10 dayswithout an ignition cycle. If thevehicle has not been started for10 days, OnStar can contactRoadside Assistance or a locksmithto help gain access to the vehicle.


338 OnStar

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels andunderpasses; or in an area withvery dense trees. If GPS signalsare not available, the OnStarsystem should still operate tocall OnStar. However, OnStarcould have difficulty identifyingthe exact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

A temporary loss of GPS can causeloss of the ability to send aTurn-by-Turn Navigation route. TheAdvisor may give a verbal route ormay ask for a call back after thevehicle is driven into an open area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Cellular reception is required forOnStar to send remote signals tothe vehicle. Do not place items over

or near the antenna to preventblocking cellular and GPS signalreception.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PressQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment 0 210. Added electrical

equipment may interfere with theoperation of the OnStar system andcause it to not operate.

Vehicle Software Updates

OnStar or GM may remotely deliversoftware updates or changes to thevehicle without further notice orconsent. These updates or changesmay enhance or maintain safety,security, or the operation of thevehicle or the vehicle systems.Software updates or changes mayaffect or erase data or settings thatare stored in the vehicle, such asOnStar Hands-Free Calling nametags, saved navigation destinations,or pre-set radio stations. NeitherOnStar nor GM is responsible forany affected or erased data orsettings. These updates or changesmay also collect personalinformation. Such collection isdescribed in the OnStar privacystatement or separately disclosed atthe time of installation. Theseupdates or changes may also causea system to automaticallycommunicate with GM servers tocollect information about vehicle


OnStar 339

system status, identify whetherupdates or changes are available,or deliver updates or changes. Anactive OnStar agreement constitutesconsent to these software updatesor changes and agreement thateither OnStar or GM may remotelydeliver them to the vehicle.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada). Werecommend that you review it. If youhave any questions, call1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)or pressQ to speak with anAdvisor. Users of wirelesscommunications are cautioned thatthe privacy of any information sentvia wireless cellular communicationscannot be assured. Third partiesmay unlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - SoftwareAcknowledgements

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software and otherthird party software. Below are thenotices and licenses associatedwith libcurl and unzip and for otherthird party software please seehttp://opensource.lge.com/index

www.onstar.com/us/en/

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,and distribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee ishereby granted, provided that theabove copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in allcopies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ORCOPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THEUSE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice,the name of a copyright holder shallnot be used in advertising orotherwise to promote the sale, useor other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization ofthe copyright holder.


340 OnStar

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license.The definitive version of thisdocument should be availableat ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyrightand license, “Info-ZIP” is defined asthe following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, ChrisHerborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, KaiUwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White.

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind,express or implied. In no event shallInfo-ZIP or its contributors be heldliable for any direct, indirect,incidental, special or consequentialdamages arising out of the use of orinability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer,and this list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer,and this list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of a

self-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has notbeen removed from the binaryor disabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existingports with new graphicalinterfaces, and dynamic,shared, or static libraryversions–must be plainlymarked as such and must notbe misrepresented as beingthe original source. Suchaltered versions also must notbe misrepresented as beingInfo-ZIP releases–including,but not limited to, labeling ofthe altered versions with thenames “Info-ZIP” (or anyvariation thereof, including, butnot limited to, differentcapitalizations), “PocketUnZip,” “WiZ” or “MacZip”without the explicit permissionof Info-ZIP. Such alteredversions are further prohibitedfrom misrepresentative use of


OnStar 341

the Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”and “MacZip” for its ownsource and binary releases.


342 Index

Index AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . 210Additional InformationOnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . 225Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . .154, 156Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . .58AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

Light On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Airbags (cont'd)On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56AlertSide Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . . 193

All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133AntennaFixed Mast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . 184Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

AudioTheft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 128

Audio PlayersCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31


Index 343

Automatic (cont'd)Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Transmission Fluid . . . . . . 221, 224

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

AuxiliaryDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Avoiding Untrusted MediaDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

BBatteryExterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Battery - North America . . . .236, 284Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . . 240BluetoothOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

BrakeSystem Warning Light . . . . . . . . 105

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 171Bulb ReplacementCenter High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . 245

Front Turn Signal,Sidemarker, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . 245Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 196Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

CaliforniaProposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . .212, 236, 284,

Back CoverCameraRear Vision (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . 2Capacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

CargoTie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . . . 30Caution, Danger, and Warning . . . . 3CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . 103CheckEngine Light (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Ignition Transmission Lock . . . 240Child RestraintsInfants and Young Children . . . . .69


344 Index

Child Restraints (cont'd)Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 83Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 154Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . 156

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . 323CompartmentsStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92ConnectionsOnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

ControlTraction and ElectronicStability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36CoolantEngine Temperature Gauge . . 100

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154, 156Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 319Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . . . 325

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . 323Danger, Warning, and Caution . . . . 3Data CollectionInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 329OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . 328Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30DevicesAuxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

DiagnosticsOnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124DoorCargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . .30Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . 315Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162For Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . .23Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 165If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 166Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163


Index 345

Driving (cont'd)Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 163Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 167Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Dual TireRotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

EE85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Electrical SystemEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Floor Console Fuse Block . . . . 251Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 246Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

EmergencyOnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Check Light (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Compartment Overview . . . . . . . 215Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Engine (cont'd)Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .99Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114Running While Parked . . . . . . . . 179Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Enhanced Technology Glass . . . . 39Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . 328Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 120Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 121Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

FFanEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 123Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

FlexFuelE85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298FluidAutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 224

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Frequency StatementRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Front Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23


346 Index

Fuel (cont'd)Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . 108Requirements, California . . . . . 196

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 283FusesEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Floor Console Fuse Block . . . . 251Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 246

GGas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . .99Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 299Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Glass, Enhanced Technology . . . . 39GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 123Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 109High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 121

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37HeaterEngine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154, 156High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 165Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . 186

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91How to Wear Seat BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154, 156

IIdle SystemFast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . 37Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

JJump Starting - NorthAmerica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

KKeyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . .26

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24


Index 347

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . 254LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . 121Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Malfunction Indicator(Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Lamps, Bulb Replacement . . . . . . 243Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95LightingEntry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . 124

LightsAirbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Lights (cont'd)Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Brake System Warning . . . . . . . 105Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Check Engine (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 108Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 121Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . 101Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108StabiliTrak OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . .30Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Locks (cont'd)Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 108Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311

Maintenance and CareAdditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . 301Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . 103Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38MediaAvoiding Untrusted Devices . . 136

MessagesEngine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114


348 Index

MirrorsConvex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Trailer Tow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . . . 37Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

NNavigationOnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . 171Noise Control System . . . . . . . . . . 238

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 220Engine Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . .99

Oil (cont'd)Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . 68Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . 319OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

OnStar Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 333OnStar Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335OnStar Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331OnStar Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330OnStar Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332OnStar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146OperationInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 131

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . . . 325

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128, 130

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 240

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . 178Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . . 213

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . 175Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . . . . 54PrivacyVehicle Data Recording . . . . . . . 328

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . . 322


Index 349

Proposition65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . .212, 236, 284,

Back Cover

RRadio Frequency Statement . . . . 326Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Rear Climate Control System . . . 156Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . . . 156Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . 191Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311

Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . 288

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . . . 67Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Replacing Seat Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . . . 327General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . . 315

Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

SSafety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . . . 327General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . 322Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55How to Wear Seat BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Replacing after a Crash . . . . . . . .55Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . .54

SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . .42Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Securing Child Restraints . . . . 81, 83


350 Index

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Climate Control System . . . . . . . 154Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . 213Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . .311Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Parts Identification Label . . . . . 312Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 322ServicesSpecial Application . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . 193Side Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

SidemarkerBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Special Application Services . . . . 305Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Start Assist, Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . 28Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . 239Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

Storage AreasFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . 87StrutsGas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Swing-out Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

SwitchesAirbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3SystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 329Noise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

TTaillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . 319Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . 34Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253All-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Dual Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Pressure Monitor Operation . . 263


Index 351

Tires (cont'd)Pressure Monitor System . . . . . 262Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Terminology and Definitions . . 258Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 273When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . 106TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . . 200Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207General Information . . . . . . . . . . 200Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 288Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . 209Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

TrailerSway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . 209Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . 221, 224

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

UUniform Tire Quality Grading . . . 271Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Identification Number (VIN) . . . 312Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . . 105Caution and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

WarningsHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance . . 273Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . 73Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Enhanced Technology Glass . . .39Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38


352 Index

Windows (cont'd)Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Swing-out Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

WindshieldReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . 240

23380337 B

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

18_GMC_Savana_COV_en_US_23380337B_2018FEB12.ai 1 2/2/2018 1:13:32 PM18_GMC_Savana_COV_en_US_23380337B_2018FEB12.ai 1 2/2/2018 1:13:32 PM

owners manual - gmc · this manual including, but not limited to, gm, the gm logo, gmc, the gmc...

Documents